Model MET-C1 Machine Code: D176/D177 Field Service Manual

September, 2013 Subject to change

Important Safety Notices

Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. 2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. 3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components. 4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-up period. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electrical components as the copier starts operation. 5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.

Health Safety Conditions

1. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes with plenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical attention. 2. The copier, which use high voltage power source, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer service representative who has completed the training course on those models. Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an explosion might occur.

The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations. The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the

manufacturer. Do not recharge or burn the batteries. Used batteries must be handled in accordance with local regulations.

Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly when exposed to an open flame. 2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.) 3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations. 4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required. Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. CAUTION MARKING:

Warnings, Cautions, Notes

In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. 2

 A Warning indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Warning could result in death or serious injury.

A Caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation. Failure to obey a Caution could result in minor or moderate injury or damage to the machine or other property.

Obey these guidelines to avoid problems such as misfeeds, damage to originals, loss of valuable data and to prevent damage to the machine. This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.

Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp SEF LEF Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF) [B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)

Trademarks
Microsoft, Windows, and MS-DOS are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and /or other countries. PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated. PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company. Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation. PowerPC is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involved with those marks.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Important Safety Notices...................................................................................................................................1 Prevention of Physical Injury..........................................................................................................................1 Health Safety Conditions...............................................................................................................................1 Observance of Electrical Safety Standards.................................................................................................1 Safety and Ecological Notes for Disposal...................................................................................................2 Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................2 Warnings, Cautions, Notes...........................................................................................................................2 Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks.........................................................................................................4 Trademarks.....................................................................................................................................................4

1. Product Information
Product Overview.............................................................................................................................................21 Component Layout.......................................................................................................................................21 Scanner Unit.................................................................................................................................................22 Laser Exposure Unit.....................................................................................................................................23 Image Transfer Unit......................................................................................................................................24 PCDU............................................................................................................................................................25 Toner Supply / Waste Toner Bottle...........................................................................................................26 Paper Feed Unit...........................................................................................................................................27 Duplex Unit...................................................................................................................................................28 By-pass unit .................................................................................................................................................29 Fusing Unit....................................................................................................................................................30 Paper Transfer / Paper Exit.........................................................................................................................31 Air Flow.........................................................................................................................................................32 Drive Unit......................................................................................................................................................33 Board / Switch............................................................................................................................................34 Paper Path....................................................................................................................................................35 Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................37 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration............................................................................................39 Diagram........................................................................................................................................................39 Options................................................................................................................................................39 Specifications....................................................................................................................................................43 Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Similar Products.......................................................................44 Differences from similar models..................................................................................................................44

Scan, LD unit, Paper feed unit............................................................................................................44 Duplex, Driving, Main frame.............................................................................................................44 PCDU....................................................................................................................................................45 Fusing...................................................................................................................................................46 Electrical component...........................................................................................................................46 New features of D176/D177...................................................................................................................46 Important notice for machine......................................................................................................................47

2. Installation
Installation Requirements.................................................................................................................................49 Environment..................................................................................................................................................49 Machine Space Requirements....................................................................................................................50 Machine Dimensions...................................................................................................................................51 Power Requirements....................................................................................................................................51 Input voltage level...............................................................................................................................52 Main Machine Installation...............................................................................................................................53 Important notice on security issues.............................................................................................................53 Overview.............................................................................................................................................53 Password setting procedure...............................................................................................................54 Installation Flow Chart.................................................................................................................................59 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................59 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................61 Removal of packing materials and shipping retainers / Removal of PCDU seal..........................61 Toner bottle installation.......................................................................................................................66 Attaching the optical cloth pocket.....................................................................................................67 Attaching paper output tray parts......................................................................................................68 Connecting the power cord...............................................................................................................68 Image quality test / settings........................................................................................................................69 Image quality test................................................................................................................................69 Checking the copy image with the test chart....................................................................................69 Paper setting........................................................................................................................................69 Moving the Machine...................................................................................................................................69 Paper Feed Unit PB3210.................................................................................................................................71 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................71

Installation procedure..................................................................................................................................71 Paper Feed Unit PB3150.................................................................................................................................75 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................75 Installation procedure..................................................................................................................................75 Caster Table Type M3.....................................................................................................................................79 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................79 Installation procedure..................................................................................................................................79 How to place MFP on the caster table..............................................................................................80 How to place the Paper Feed Unit PB3150 on the caster table.....................................................80 Platen Cover PN2000.....................................................................................................................................82 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................82 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................82 ARDF DF3090..................................................................................................................................................85 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................85 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................85 When feeding thin paper...................................................................................................................90 1 Bin Tray BN3110.........................................................................................................................................91 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................91 Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................91 Internal Shift Tray SH3070.............................................................................................................................99 Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................99 Installation procedure..................................................................................................................................99 Side Tray Type M3........................................................................................................................................104 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................104 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................105 Internal Finisher SR3130...............................................................................................................................109 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................109 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................109 Punch Unit PU3040.......................................................................................................................................120 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................120 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................121 Internal Finisher SR3180...............................................................................................................................128 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................128

Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................129 Staple setting as an initial setting.....................................................................................................140 Anti-Condensation Heater............................................................................................................................142 Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)......................................................................................................142 Accessory Check..............................................................................................................................142 Installation procedure.......................................................................................................................143 Anti-Condensation Heater (PCDU)..........................................................................................................148 Accessory Check..............................................................................................................................148 Installation procedure.......................................................................................................................149 Key Counter Bracket Type M3.....................................................................................................................155 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................155 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................155 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A......................................................................................................158 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................158 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................158 Key Counter......................................................................................................................................158 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739-36)...............................................................................160 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................160 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................160 Imageable Area Extension Unit Type M3...................................................................................................166 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................166 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................166 When you forgot to change the SP.................................................................................................167 Internal Options.............................................................................................................................................168 List of Slots..................................................................................................................................................168 IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2...............................................................................................170 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................170 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................170 Attaching the boards........................................................................................................................171 Attaching the antenna......................................................................................................................171 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................172 Check the connection of the wireless LAN interface......................................................................172 IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A..............................................................................................................174

Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................174 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................174 File Format Converter Type E........................................................................................................................176 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................176 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................176 Copy Data Security Unit Type G..................................................................................................................178 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................178 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................178 Settings (to be done by the user)..............................................................................................................179 Equipment administrator settings.....................................................................................................179 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D....................................................................................................................180 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................180 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................180 SD Card Option.............................................................................................................................................182 SD Card Slots............................................................................................................................................182 List of Slots Used........................................................................................................................................182 SD Card Appli Move....................................................................................................................................184 Overview....................................................................................................................................................184 Move Exec.................................................................................................................................................185 Undo Exec..................................................................................................................................................187 Data Overwrite Security Unit Type H (D377).............................................................................................189 Overview....................................................................................................................................................189 Component List..........................................................................................................................................189 Before You Begin the Procedure..............................................................................................................189 Seal Check and Removal.................................................................................................................190 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................191 Camera Direct Print Card Type M3.............................................................................................................192 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................192 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................192 Browser Unit Type M9..................................................................................................................................194 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................194 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................194 Settings.......................................................................................................................................................196

Browser default setting.....................................................................................................................196 SD card for NetWare printing Type M3.....................................................................................................197 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................197 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................197 OCR Unit Type M2........................................................................................................................................199 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................199 Searchable PDF function outline..............................................................................................................199 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................199 Postscript3 Unit Type M3..............................................................................................................................202 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................202 Installation procedure...............................................................................................................................202 Security Function Installation.........................................................................................................................204 Data Overwrite Security...........................................................................................................................205 Before You Begin the Procedure.....................................................................................................205 Installation Procedure.......................................................................................................................205 HDD Encryption.........................................................................................................................................206 Before You Begin the Procedure.....................................................................................................206 Enable Encryption Setting................................................................................................................207 Check the Encryption Settings..........................................................................................................210 Print the encryption key....................................................................................................................211 Memory Unit Type M3 2GB.........................................................................................................................213 Accessory Check.......................................................................................................................................213 Installation Procedure................................................................................................................................213

3. Preventive Maintenance
PM Parts Settings............................................................................................................................................215 Replacement procedure of the PM parts.................................................................................................215 After installing the new PM parts..............................................................................................................216 Preparation before operation check........................................................................................................216 Operation check........................................................................................................................................217

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes on the Main Power Switch.................................................................................................................219 Push Switch................................................................................................................................................219 Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)..............................................................................219

10

Shutdown Method............................................................................................................................220 Forced Shutdown..............................................................................................................................220 Beforehand.....................................................................................................................................................222 Special Tools..................................................................................................................................................223 Exterior Covers...............................................................................................................................................224 Front Cover................................................................................................................................................224 Controller Cover........................................................................................................................................226 Upper Left Cover.......................................................................................................................................226 Left Rear Cover..........................................................................................................................................227 Left Cover...................................................................................................................................................227 Rear Cover.................................................................................................................................................230 Rear Right Cover.......................................................................................................................................231 Rear Lower Cover......................................................................................................................................231 Scanner Rear Cover..................................................................................................................................232 Scanner Rear Cover (Small).....................................................................................................................232 Right Rear Cover.......................................................................................................................................232 Right Upper Cover ...................................................................................................................................233 Main power switch cover.........................................................................................................................234 Waste Toner Cover...................................................................................................................................234 Reverse Tray..............................................................................................................................................235 Paper Exit Tray...........................................................................................................................................236 Paper Exit Cover........................................................................................................................................236 Paper Exit Lower Cover.............................................................................................................................236 Paper Exit Front Cover..............................................................................................................................237 Inner Upper Cover....................................................................................................................................238 Inner Lower Cover.....................................................................................................................................239 Operation Panel Unit.....................................................................................................................................240 Operation Panel........................................................................................................................................240 Board A......................................................................................................................................................241 Board B......................................................................................................................................................243 Board C......................................................................................................................................................244 LCD Panel...................................................................................................................................................244 LCD.............................................................................................................................................................245

11

Notes when replacing the LCD........................................................................................................245 Replacement procedure...................................................................................................................248 Scanner Unit...................................................................................................................................................250 Scanner Exterior........................................................................................................................................250 Scanner Upper Cover......................................................................................................................250 Scanner Right Cover.........................................................................................................................250 Scanner Front Cover.........................................................................................................................251 Scanner Left Cover...........................................................................................................................251 Exposure Glass..........................................................................................................................................252 Exposure Lamp (LED)................................................................................................................................254 Scanner Motor...........................................................................................................................................255 Lens Block...................................................................................................................................................258 Original Size Sensor.................................................................................................................................258 SIO.............................................................................................................................................................259 Scanner HP Sensor....................................................................................................................................260 DF Position Sensor.....................................................................................................................................261 Adjusting the Scanner Wire......................................................................................................................262 Scanner Wire (Front)........................................................................................................................262 Scanner wire assembly (front side).................................................................................................265 Scanner position adjustment............................................................................................................267 Scanner Wire (Rear)........................................................................................................................268 Scanner Wire Assembly (rear side)................................................................................................271 Modifying the Scanner (contact/contactless) when using ARDF..........................................................272 Procedure for the ADF......................................................................................................................272 Procedure for the scanner................................................................................................................275 Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................................276 Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................276 Before Replacement.........................................................................................................................277 Removing...........................................................................................................................................277 Installing a New Laser Unit..............................................................................................................278 Adjustment after replacing the laser unit.........................................................................................279 Polygon Motor...........................................................................................................................................280 Adjustment after replacing the polygon motor...............................................................................280

12

PCDU..............................................................................................................................................................281 PCDU..........................................................................................................................................................281 Before replacing the PCDU..............................................................................................................281 Replacement......................................................................................................................................281 PCU/Development Unit............................................................................................................................283 Before replacing a PCU...................................................................................................................283 Before replacing a Development Unit.............................................................................................285 Replacement......................................................................................................................................285 Notes for assembling PCU/Development unit ..............................................................................288 Method for checking after replacement.........................................................................................288 Imaging Temperature Sensor (Thermistor)..............................................................................................289 Waste Toner...................................................................................................................................................291 Replacement..............................................................................................................................................291 Adjustment after replacing........................................................................................................................291 Image Transfer Unit.......................................................................................................................................293 Image Transfer Belt Unit............................................................................................................................293 Adjustment before replacing the image transfer belt unit..............................................................294 Replacement......................................................................................................................................294 Image Transfer Cleaning Unit...................................................................................................................297 Adjustment before replacing the image transfer cleaning unit......................................................298 Replacement......................................................................................................................................298 Image Transfer Belt....................................................................................................................................301 Replacement......................................................................................................................................301 Adjustment after replacing the Image transfer belt........................................................................304 Paper Transfer Roller.................................................................................................................................305 Paper Transfer Roller Unit ........................................................................................................................305 Adjustment before replacing the paper transfer roller unit............................................................305 Replacement......................................................................................................................................305 Fusing Entrance Sensor.............................................................................................................................307 TM (ID) Sensor...........................................................................................................................................308 Before Replacing the TM(ID) sensor...............................................................................................308 Replacement procedure...................................................................................................................310 Adjustment after replacing the TM(ID) sensor................................................................................311

13

Temperature and Humidity Sensor..........................................................................................................312 ITB Contact and Release Sensor..............................................................................................................313 Drive Unit........................................................................................................................................................315 Overview....................................................................................................................................................315 Paper Feed Motor.....................................................................................................................................316 Transport Motor.........................................................................................................................................316 Transfer Motor Unit...................................................................................................................................317 Imaging Drive Unit....................................................................................................................................318 PCU Motor: CMY......................................................................................................................................320 Development Motor: CMY.......................................................................................................................320 Development solenoid..............................................................................................................................320 Fusing Motor..............................................................................................................................................322 Paper Exit / Pressure Release Motor.......................................................................................................322 Duplex Entrance Motor.............................................................................................................................323 Toner Transport Motor..............................................................................................................................324 Sub Hopper...............................................................................................................................................325 K.........................................................................................................................................................325 C.........................................................................................................................................................325 M........................................................................................................................................................327 Y.........................................................................................................................................................328 Toner End Sensor......................................................................................................................................329 Toner Bottle Drive Motor..........................................................................................................................330 K.........................................................................................................................................................330 C.........................................................................................................................................................330 M........................................................................................................................................................331 Y.........................................................................................................................................................331 ID Chip.......................................................................................................................................................331 K.........................................................................................................................................................331 C.........................................................................................................................................................332 M........................................................................................................................................................332 Y.........................................................................................................................................................333 Transport screw.........................................................................................................................................334 Y.........................................................................................................................................................334

14

M........................................................................................................................................................337 C.........................................................................................................................................................338 K.........................................................................................................................................................338 Fusing Unit......................................................................................................................................................340 Fusing Unit..................................................................................................................................................340 Adjustment before replacing the fusing unit....................................................................................340 Replacement......................................................................................................................................340 Fusing Entrance Guide Plate.....................................................................................................................341 Replacement......................................................................................................................................341 Cleaning the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate.....................................................................................342 Fusing Exit Guide Plate.............................................................................................................................342 Replacement......................................................................................................................................342 Cleaning the Fusing Exit Guide Plate..............................................................................................343 Fusing Upper Cover..................................................................................................................................344 Fusing Lower Cover...................................................................................................................................344 Fusing Front Cover.....................................................................................................................................345 Fusing Rear Cover.....................................................................................................................................346 Heating sleeve unit....................................................................................................................................347 Replacement......................................................................................................................................347 How to cancel SC544-02/SC554-02 with a new unit detection fuse.......................................350 Pressure Roller............................................................................................................................................351 Adjustment before replacing the pressure roller............................................................................351 Replacement......................................................................................................................................351 Thermostat Unit..........................................................................................................................................353 Non-contact Thermistor Unit.....................................................................................................................354 Fusing Thermistor.......................................................................................................................................355 Fusing Thermopile Unit..............................................................................................................................355 Pressure Roller HP Sensor.........................................................................................................................356 Fusing Shield Position Sensor...................................................................................................................356 Fusing Shield Drive Motor........................................................................................................................357 Paper Exit........................................................................................................................................................359 Paper Exit Unit...........................................................................................................................................359 Paper Exit Switching Solenoid..................................................................................................................359

15

Paper Exit Sensor.......................................................................................................................................360 Reverse Sensor..........................................................................................................................................362 Reverse Motor...........................................................................................................................................363 Fusing Exit Sensor......................................................................................................................................364 Paper Feed.....................................................................................................................................................366 Paper Feed Unit.........................................................................................................................................366 1st Paper Feed Unit..........................................................................................................................366 2nd Paper Feed Unit........................................................................................................................367 Paper Dust Collection Unit........................................................................................................................369 Separation Roller, Torque Limiter.............................................................................................................370 Pick-up Roller, Paper Feed Roller.............................................................................................................371 1st Tray Lift Motor / 2nd Tray Lift Motor................................................................................................372 Vertical Transport Sensor..........................................................................................................................373 Limit Sensor................................................................................................................................................374 Paper End Sensor......................................................................................................................................375 Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................376 By-pass Tray Unit...........................................................................................................................................377 By-pass Tray..............................................................................................................................................377 By-pass Paper End Sensor........................................................................................................................379 By-pass Pick-up Roller...............................................................................................................................380 By-pass Paper Feed Roller........................................................................................................................381 By-pass Separation Roller........................................................................................................................381 Torque Limiter.............................................................................................................................................382 Duplex Unit.....................................................................................................................................................383 Duplex Unit................................................................................................................................................383 Duplex/By-pass Motor.............................................................................................................................385 Duplex Entrance Sensor............................................................................................................................387 Duplex Exit Sensor....................................................................................................................................388 Electrical Components...................................................................................................................................391 Overview....................................................................................................................................................391 Printed Circuits/Parts Inside the Controller Box.............................................................................391 Printed Circuits Behind the Controller Box......................................................................................392 Printed Circuit/Parts Inside the Power Box.....................................................................................392

16

Printed Circuits Behind the Power Box............................................................................................393 IPU..............................................................................................................................................................393 BCU............................................................................................................................................................394 When installing the new BCU..........................................................................................................394 Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU.............................................................................395 Controller Board........................................................................................................................................396 NVRAMs on the controller board...................................................................................................397 HDD............................................................................................................................................................401 Adjustment after replacement..........................................................................................................402 Imaging IOB..............................................................................................................................................402 HVP_TTS.....................................................................................................................................................403 PSU (AC Controller Board)......................................................................................................................404 PSU (DC Power)........................................................................................................................................404 Paper Transport IOB.................................................................................................................................405 HVP-CB......................................................................................................................................................406 When removing the HVP-CB together with its bracket..................................................................409 Fans/Filters.....................................................................................................................................................411 Odor Filter..................................................................................................................................................411 Development Intake Fan/Right................................................................................................................411 Development Intake Fan/Left...................................................................................................................412 Ozone Exhaust Fan...................................................................................................................................413 Paper Exit Cooling Fan.............................................................................................................................413 Fusing Exhaust Heat Fan...........................................................................................................................414 Toner Supply Cooling Fan........................................................................................................................415 PSU Cooling Fan.......................................................................................................................................416 Power Box Cooling Fan............................................................................................................................417 Image Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................418 Auto Color Calibration.............................................................................................................................418 Printer Gamma Correction........................................................................................................................418 Copy Mode.......................................................................................................................................419 Printer Mode.....................................................................................................................................423 Color Registration......................................................................................................................................424 Check the occurrence of color registration errors..........................................................................424

17

Judgment for type of color registration error..................................................................................424 Adjustment after replacing............................................................................................................................434 Image position adjustment........................................................................................................................434 Parts that require adjustment............................................................................................................434 Laser-related adjustment..................................................................................................................434 Scanner-related adjustment.............................................................................................................436 ADF image adjustment.....................................................................................................................439

5. Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Mode...................................................................................................................................441 Service Call Codes....................................................................................................................................441 Service Call Conditions ...................................................................................................................441 SC logging.................................................................................................................................................442 SC automatic reboot.................................................................................................................................442 Controller self-diagnosis outline......................................................................................................445 Controller self-diagnosis flowchart..................................................................................................446 Service Call 101-195...................................................................................................................................450 SC100 (Engine: Scanning).......................................................................................................................450 Service Call 201-285...................................................................................................................................457 SC200 (Engine: Image Writing)..............................................................................................................457 Service Call 324-396...................................................................................................................................463 SC300 (Engine: Charge, Development).................................................................................................463 Service Call 441-498...................................................................................................................................468 SC400 (Engine: Around the Drum).........................................................................................................468 Service Call 501-584...................................................................................................................................474 SC500 (Engine: Paper transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport)...................................................474 Service Call 620-689...................................................................................................................................520 SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others)........................................................................................520 SC600 (Controller)...................................................................................................................................528 Service Call 700-792...................................................................................................................................539 SC700 (Engine: Peripherals)....................................................................................................................539 Service Call 816-899...................................................................................................................................551 SC800 (Controller)...................................................................................................................................551 Service Call 900-998...................................................................................................................................612

18

SC900 (Engine: Others)...........................................................................................................................612 SC900 (Controller)...................................................................................................................................613 When SC549 is displayed...........................................................................................................................620 Troubleshooting Flowchart.......................................................................................................................620 Fusing Shield Check..................................................................................................................................621 Solution......................................................................................................................................................624 When SC670 is displayed...........................................................................................................................626 Troubleshooting Flowchart.......................................................................................................................626 Jam Detection.................................................................................................................................................627 Jam Display................................................................................................................................................627 Sensor Locations........................................................................................................................................628 Clearing a paper jam................................................................................................................................629 Paper Jam History......................................................................................................................................629 History checking method..................................................................................................................629 Paper Jam Display............................................................................................................................630 Jam Codes and Display Codes................................................................................................................630 Paper Size Code.......................................................................................................................................634 Image Quality................................................................................................................................................635 When an abnormal image is generated.................................................................................................635 Roller pitch.................................................................................................................................................636 OCR Unit Type M2........................................................................................................................................637 Recovery procedure..................................................................................................................................637 Electrical Component Defects.......................................................................................................................638

6. Environment
Environment....................................................................................................................................................641 Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................641 Timer Settings....................................................................................................................................642 Return to Stand-by Mode.................................................................................................................642 Recommendation..............................................................................................................................643 Energy Save Effectiveness........................................................................................................................643

19

20

1. Product Information
Product Overview
Component Layout

No. 1 2 Scanner Unit Paper Exit Unit

Description

No. 6 7

Description Paper Feed Unit Waste Toner Unit

21

1. Product Information

No. 3 4 5 Fusing Unit

Description

No. 8 9 10

Description Laser Exposure Unit PCDU Image Transfer Unit

Paper Transfer Unit Duplex Unit

Scanner Unit

No. 1 2

Description Operation Panel Scanner lamp Unit (LED)

No. 6 7

Description Scanner Input/Output (SIO) board Scanner motor

22

Product Overview

No. 3 4 5

Description Scanner Home Position sensor Anti-condensation heater (Scanner heater) *1 DF Position Sensor

No. 8 9 10

Description Auto Paper Size detection (APS) sensor 1 Auto Paper Size detection (APS) sensor 2 Sensor Board Unit (SBU)

*1 Option

Laser Exposure Unit

No. 1 2 Skew motor

Description

No. 5 6

Description Polygon mirror motor LD Drive Board (M/Y) 23

Synchronizing detector board: M/Y-S

1. Product Information

No. 3 4 Skew motor Skew motor

Description

No. 7 8

Description LD Drive Board (Bk/C) Synchronizing detector board: Bk/C-S

Image Transfer Unit

No. 1 2 3 4

Description Interlock switch: Front cover (LD Safety Switch) Interlock switch: Duplex Unit (LD Safety Switch) ITB contact and release sensor TM/P sensor shutter solenoid

24

Product Overview

No. 5 6 7 TM/P sensor (rear) TM/P sensor (center) TM/P sensor (front)

Description

PCDU

No. 1 2 PCDU (Y) PCDU (M)

Description

No. 3 4 PCDU (C) PCDU (Bk)

Description

25

1. Product Information

Toner Supply / Waste Toner Bottle

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ID chip (Y)

Description

No. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Description Toner end sensor (Y) Toner transport motor (M) Toner end sensor (M) Toner transport motor (C) Toner end sensor (C) Toner end sensor (Bk) Toner transport motor (Bk)

Toner bottle drive motor (Y) ID chip (M) Toner bottle drive motor (M) ID chip (C) Toner bottle drive motor (C) ID chip (Bk)

26

Product Overview

No. 8 9

Description Toner bottle drive motor (Bk) Toner transport motor (Y)

No. 17 18

Description Waste toner capacity sensor Waste toner bottle set switch

Paper Feed Unit

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Tray set switch (1st feed tray) Lift motor (1st feed tray) Tray set switch (2nd feed tray) Lift motor (2nd feed tray) Registration sensor Size switch (2nd Feed Tray)

No. 10 11 12 13 14 15

Description Paper feed sensor (1st feed tray) Paper end sensor (2nd feed tray) Limit sensor (2nd feed tray) Transport sensor (1st feed tray) Paper end sensor (1st feed tray) Limit sensor (1st feed tray)

27

1. Product Information

No. 7 8 9

Description Anti-condensation heater Paper feed sensor (2nd Feed Tray) Transport sensor (2nd Feed Tray)

No. 16 17

Description Pick-up solenoid (2nd feed tray) Pick-up solenoid (1st feed tray)

Duplex Unit

No. 1 2 3

Description Duplex entrance motor Right door open/close switch Duplex entrance sensor

No. 5 6 7

Description By-pass pick-up solenoid By-pass/Duplex motor By-pass paper end sensor

28

Product Overview

No. 4

Description Duplex unit open/close sensor

No. 8

Description Duplex exit sensor

By-pass unit

No. 1 2 3 4

Description Main Scanning Sensor By-pass length sensor Main Scanning Sensor Side Fence Paper Contact sensor

No. 5 6 7

Description By-pass length sensor Side Fence Drive Motor Side Fence Paper Contact sensor

29

1. Product Information

Fusing Unit

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Description Fusing pressure release sensor Shield position sensor (Lower) Shield position sensor (Upper) Thermopile (edge) Thermopile (center) Fusing exit sensor Shield drive motor Fusing heater

No. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Description Thermistor (center) Thermostat (edge) Thermostat (center) NC sensor (center) NC sensor (edge) Thermistor (edge) Shield sensor 1 / 2

30

Product Overview

Paper Transfer / Paper Exit

No. 1 2 3 4

Description Inversion Motor Inversion Sensor Paper exit sensor PTR open/close sensor

No. 5 6 7

Description Fusing entrance sensor Fusing jam sensor Paper exit solenoid

31

1. Product Information

Air Flow

No. 1 2 3 4

Description Paper exit cooling fan Development intake fan/right Development intake fan/left PSU cooling fan

No. 5 6 7 8

Description Ozone exhaust fan Thermistor Toner supply cooling fan Fusing exhaust heat fan

32

Product Overview

Drive Unit

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Imaging IOB

Description

No. 7 8 9 10 11

Description Registration Motor PCU Motor: CMY Phase sensor Fusing Motor Paper Exit / Pressure Release Motor

Development Motor: CMY Development Motor: Black PCU: Black / Image Transfer Motor Paper Feed Motor Transport Motor

33

1. Product Information

Board / Switch

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Power switch

Description

No. 7 8 9 10 11

Description PSU (DC Power) PSU (AC controller board) BCU Controller box cooling fan IPU

Interlock switch: front cover HVP_TTS Control board HDD Paper Transport IOB

34

Product Overview

Paper Path

No. 1 2 ARDF DF3090

Description

No. 3

Description Internal Finisher SR3130

Paper Feed Unit PB3160

35

1. Product Information

No. 1 2

Description Platen Cover PN2000 Paper Feed Unit PB3150

No. 3 4

Description Side Tray Type M3 1 Bin Tray BN3110

36

Product Overview

Drive Layout

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Description Paper feed motor Duplex / By-pass motor Transport motor Registration motor Paper transfer contact motor Fusing motor

No. 12 13 14 15 16 17

Description Toner bottle drive motor (C) Toner bottle drive motor (M) Toner bottle drive motor (Y) Toner transport motor (Y) Toner transport motor (M) Toner transport motor (C)

37

1. Product Information

No. 7 8 9 10 11

Description Paper exit / Pressure release motor Duplex entrance motor Inversion motor Scanner motor Toner bottle drive motor (Bk)

No. 18 19 20 21 22

Description Toner transport motor (Bk) Development Motor: CMY PCU Motor: CMY Development Motor: Black PCU: Black / Image Transfer Motor

38

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

Diagram
Options
Mainframe: ARDF as standard (NA, EU)

Item Platen Cover PN 2000

Machine Code D700 (EU, Asia, TWN, CHN, KOR)

Call out 1

39

1. Product Information

Item ARDF DF3090

Machine Code D779 (Asia, TWN, CHN, KOR) D148-81 (NA) D148-85 (TWN, CHN) D694 D178 D787 D692 D691 D725 D690 D766 D739-05 D716-17 D716-27 D716-28 D163 D163 G578 D164-01 D164-03 D165-01 (NA)

Call out 2

Smart Operation Panel Type M3 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 Caster Table Type M3 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 1 Bin Tray BN3110 Internal Shift Tray SH3070 Side Tray Type M3 Internal Finisher SR3130 Internal Finisher SR3180 Handset HS3020 Punch Unit PU3040 NA Punch Unit PU3040 EU Punch Unit PU3040 SC Fax Option Type M3 G3 Interface Unit Type M3 Memory Unit Type B 32MB IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2 Memory Unit Type M3 2GB

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 -

Fax Connection Unit Type M3

D165-02 (EU) D165-03 (Asia)

40

Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration

Item

Machine Code D165-05 (NA)

Call out

Postscript3 Unit Type M3

D165-06 (EU) D165-07 (Asia)

Camera Direct Print Card Type M3

D165-13 D165-25 (NA)

Browser Unit Type M9

D165-26 (EU) D165-27 (Asia, TWN, CHN, KOR) D165-19 D165-20 (NA)

SD card for NetWare printing Type M3

IPDS Unit Type M3

D165-21 (EU) D165-22 (Asia) D166-25 (NA)

OCR Unit Type M2

D166-26 (EU) D166-27 (Asia)

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 Imageable Area Extension Unit Type M3 Marker Type 30 ADF Handle Type C IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D File Format Converter Type E Copy Data Security Unit Type G Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A Key Counter Bracket Type M3 Card Reader Bracket Type 3352 Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 1 License

D739-06 D739-07 H903 D593-81 B679 D566 D377-04 D640 B870 D739-09 D593-61 B869-01

41

1. Product Information

Item Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 10 License Unicode Font Package for SAP(R) 100 License DataOverwriteSecurity Unit Type H Waste Toner Bottle MP C6003 External Keyboard Bracket Type M3

Machine Code B869-02 B869-03 D377-06 D860-01 D739-10

Call out -

42

Specifications

Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information: General Specifications Supported Paper Sizes Software Accessories Optional Equipment Other Specifications

43

1. Product Information

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Similar Products

Differences from similar models
Scan, LD unit, Paper feed unit
Item D176/D177 D146/D147/D148/D149/D150 (D146/D147) LD unit LD 1 beam LD 1 beam (D148/D149/D150) LD 4 beams Change of pick-up roller material Locked tray Paper feed No pick-up solenoid No paper feed sensor (main frame only) No double feed detection Double feed detection (D150 only) Tray pull-in mechanism

Duplex, Driving, Main frame

Item D176/D177 Duplex: 52 - 169 g/m2 No paper exit full sensor Up to 2300 maximum. (5504, 100) D146/D147/D148/D149/D150 Duplex: 52 - 256g/m2 Jam detection LED (D148/D149/ D150 only) Up to 4700 maximum. (5502, 10002, 1500, 100) (D146/D147) Memory 1.5 GB 1.5 GB (D148/D149/D150) 2.0 GB

Duplex / Exit

Paper Feed Capacity

44

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Similar Products

Item First copy time (BW)

D176/D177

D146/D147/D148/D149/D150 (D146/D147) 4.6 sec

3.1 sec

(D148) 4.0 sec (D149/D150) 3.1 sec (D146/D147) 7.3 sec

First copy time (Color)

4.6 sec

(D148) 5.7 sec (D149/D150) 4.6 sec (D146/D147) 19 sec

Warm-up time

Less than 19 sec

(D148) 20 sec (D149/D150) 17 sec

By-pass

No side fence set assist function

Side fence set assist function(D150 only) (D146/D147)

Air flow

8 fans

8 fans (D148/D149/D150) 11 fans

PCDU
Item D176/D177 DC charge roller (Contact type) No lubricant bar PCDU 3-layer drum Discharge lamp is in the mainframe Correction SP value must be input when PCU is replaced Dev. Unit Two mixing augers, two-way circulation (see diagram [B] below) AC charge roller (No contact type) Lubricant bar 4-layer drum No discharge lamp D146/D147/D148/D149/D150

Two mixing augers, one way circulation (see diagram [A] below)

45

1. Product Information

Fusing
Item Fusing sleeve unit D176/D177 No reflective plate with fusing sleeve unit D146/D147/D148/D149/D150 Reflective plate with fusing sleeve unit

Electrical component
Item HVP-CB D176/D177 Correction SP value must be input when this board is replaced. D146/D147/D148/D149/D150 No SP value

New features of D176/D177

Item SFU (Smart Firmware Update) Description New feature of firmware update. Firmware can be updated through a simple operation at the operation panel only if the machine is connected to @Remote.

46

Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Similar Products

Important notice for machine

Item Description New PCU has unstable charging characteristics and sensitive to charging voltage. When replacing parts below, please make sure to correct SP values to optimize imaging process. PCU HVP-CB

Correction SP value after replacement of specific parts

47

1. Product Information

48

2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment

Temperature Range: Humidity Range: Ambient Illumination: Ventilation:

10C to 32C (50F to 90F) 15% to 80% RH Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight.) Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person

49

2. Installation

1. Avoid areas exposed to sudden temperature changes: 1) Areas directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner. 2) Areas directly exposed to heat from a heater. 2. Do not place the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gases. 3. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. (D135 for NA can be installed only up to 2,500m (8,202 ft.)) 4. Place the main machine on a strong and level base. Inclination on any side should be no more than 5 mm (0.2"). 5. Do not place the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibrations.

Machine Space Requirements

[A] [B] [C] [D]

Left Rear Right Front

Over 100 mm (3.9") Over 100 mm (3.9") Over 100 mm (3.9") Over 750 mm (29.5")

50

Installation Requirements

Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above.

Machine Dimensions

[A] [B] [C]

1210 mm 1030 mm 180 mm

[D] [E] [F]

247 mm 788 mm 587mm

Power Requirements

Insert the plug firmly in the outlet. Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord. Ground the machine. 51

2. Installation

Input voltage level

Destination Power supply voltage Rated current consumption Permissible voltage fluctuation Imaging: 108V(120V-10%) to 138V(127V+8.66%) Motions: 102V(120V-15%) to 138V(127V+8.66%)

NA

120 to 127V

12A or more

EU AP CHN TWN 110 V 20A 220 to 240V 10A Imaging: 10% Motions: 15%

52

Main Machine Installation

Main Machine Installation

Important notice on security issues
In order to increase the security of the MFP, and to ensure that the customer sets the administrator password, an administrator set/change prompt display is shown up at the first power-up.

Overview
The following Program/Change Administrator screen is displayed at the first power-up.

When the customers set the administrator/supervisor login password, the display disappears and the home display will appear. The customers, however, can erase this screen with the following procedure in the case that they think there is no need to set the password. 1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then touch [OK] without inputting any password. 2. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up. 3. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2. 4. Press the [OK] button, then the home display appears. SP5-755-002 allows you to skip this screen temporarily and continue the installation procedure without setting an administrator password. However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time you turn the power OFF/ON, if the password is not set.

53

2. Installation

Password setting procedure

For more details about this security issue, see Notes on Using Multi-Function Printers Safely supplied with the MFP. When Supervisor / Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the Change Supervisor login password window wont display. The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via System Settings. But the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is turned ON if the passwords are input this way. So we recommend the customers to set the passwords via network or the Program/Change Administrator screen. 1. Install the MFP. 2. Turn the main power switch ON. 3. Change the Supervisor login password.

54

Main Machine Installation

4. Input the password.

5. Press [OK].

55

2. Installation

6. Confirm the Password.

7. Press [OK].

56

Main Machine Installation

8. Change the Administrator 1 login password.

9. Input the password.

10. Press [OK].

57

2. Installation

11. Confirm the password.

12. Press [OK].

13. Cycle the power OFF/ON.

58

Main Machine Installation

Installation Flow Chart

Accessory Check
Description Power Supply Cord Operation Instruction (User Guide) Q'ty 1 1 59

2. Installation

Description Operation Instruction (Read This First) Operation Instruction (Security Guide) CD-ROM - Driver (NA/EU/AA) CD-ROM - OI (NA/EU/AA) CD-ROM - Driver/OI (TWN/CHN) Holder - Glass cleaner Sheet : Exposure Glass Image Transfer Cover TAPPING SCREW Plate - Logo Sheet - Logo End Fence - Output Tray Sheet - Application : Multi Language: Blank Sheet - Application : Multi Language: EU Sheet - Journal : Blank Sheet - Safety (EU) Sheet - EMC (EU) Sheet - Name: TEL (CHN) Sheet - EULA Sheet - Security Password Seal - Caution Decal - Paper Tray Decal - Original Table Decal - Caution : Original : Multi Language

Q'ty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

60

Main Machine Installation

Installation Procedure

Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape. Put the machine on the paper tray unit first if you install an optional paper tray unit at the same time. Then install the machine and other options. Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may need them in the future if you transport the machine to another location.

Removal of packing materials and shipping retainers / Removal of PCDU seal

1. Remove the machine from the box, and check the items in the package. Before lifting up the machine, as there are hidden handles, remove the retainers [A] at the lower front right.

61

2. Installation

When you lift the machine, hold the correct parts, as shown in the diagram below. Do not lift by holding the scanner unit, etc., because this might deform the machine or break the exterior covers

62

Main Machine Installation

2. Remove the orange tape and retainers on the outside.

63

2. Installation

3. Remove the paper size decal [A] on the exposure glass.

4. Pull out the 1st and 2nd paper feed tray, and remove the orange tape.

5. Remove the scanner support [A].

64

Main Machine Installation

6. Open the front cover, and store the scanner support in the storage location [A].

The factory setting sheet is kept in the position [A]. 7. Carefully pull out the heat seal [A].

65

2. Installation

8. Secure the ITB unit front cover [A] ( x1).

Toner bottle installation

1. Open the front cover. 2. Shake the toner bottle (Bk) 5 to 6 times. 3. Remove the toner bottle protection cap [A].

66

Main Machine Installation

4. Push the toner bottle into the machine slowly.

5. Set the toner bottles (Y, M, C) in the same way. 6. Close the front cover. When the power is turned on, it will fill up for the first time in about 5 minutes.

Attaching the optical cloth pocket

1. Clean the adhesive surface of the optical cloth pocket with an alcohol-soaked cloth. 2. Attach the optical cloth pocket [A] to the left side of the scanner and put the optical cloth into the pocket.

67

2. Installation

Attaching paper output tray parts

1. Attach the part [A] to the paper output tray. First, insert and attach the front pin (inside the blue circle).

Connecting the power cord

Do not use any connectors other than the power cord provided. Also, do not use an extension cord. 1. Connect the power cord to the machine.

68

Main Machine Installation

Image quality test / settings

Image quality test
When there are other options to be installed, install according to the procedure for each. 1. After checking that clamps, etc., have been removed, connect the power plug to the wall socket. 2. Turn the main power supply switch ON. 3. Check that the operation panel shows the following display. "Please supply the tray with paper." 4. The paper size is basically detected automatically. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray slowly until it stops. 2. While pressing the release lever, adjust the side fence to the paper size to be set. 3. Set the back fence.

Checking the copy image with the test chart

Check the copy image with the test chart.

Paper setting
1. If necessary, adjust the registration for the paper feed tray. * SP1-002-002 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 1) * SP1-002-003 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 2)

Moving the Machine

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance. Before turning off the main power, make sure 100% is shown as available memory on the screen if the fax option is installed. Turn off the main power. Disconnect the power plug from the outlet. Close all covers and paper trays, including the front cover and bypass tray. Keep the machine level and carry it carefully, taking care not to jolt or tip it, and protect the machine from strong shocks. 69

2. Installation

When moving the machine, do not press against the ADF.

70

Paper Feed Unit PB3210

Paper Feed Unit PB3210

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 SCREW:M4X10 SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 BRACKET:COUPLING Description Qty 2 1 2

Installation procedure

The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently. If it is lifted without care, handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in an injury. When installing this option, turn the machine power OFF, and unplug the power supply cord from the wall socket. If it is installed with the power on, it may result in an electric shock or a malfunction. Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over. If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury. 1. Remove the orange tape and retainers. 2. Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pin [A], and place the machine on the paper feed unit. 71

2. Installation

When you lift the machine, hold the correct locations. In particular, do not lift the machine by holding the scanner unit, etc, because this may cause the machine to deform. Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place. This may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and paper feed unit properly. 3. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray. 4. Using securing bracket as a screwdriver, fix the machine to the feed unit (spring washer: screw: M410: 1).

72

Paper Feed Unit PB3210

5. Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the machine (screws: 1 each).

6. Return the paper feed tray to the machine 7. Attach the decals as shown below.

[A]: Tray number decal [B]: Paper size decal The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the machine.

73

2. Installation

8. Lock the casters of the paper feed unit.

9. Connect the power cord to the machine. Stabilizers are attached to the machine when it is shipped. Do not remove it.

10. Turn the power switch ON. 11. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the operation panel. 12. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit. SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3) SP1-002-005 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 4)

74

Paper Feed Unit PB3150

Paper Feed Unit PB3150

Accessory Check
Description Securing Bracket Screw with Spring Washer - M4 10 Screws - M4 10 Qty 2 1 2

Installation procedure

The machine should be held at the correct locations and lifted gently by two people. If it is lifted without care, handled carelessly or dropped, it may result in injury. When installing this option, turn the machine power OFF, and unplug the power supply cord from the wall socket. If it is installed with the power on, it may result in an electric shock or a malfunction. Be sure to join the machine to the paper feed unit so as to prevent equipment from falling over. If they are not connected, they may move and fall over, resulting in injury. 1. Remove the orange tape and retainers. 2. Remove the items provided (fixing screws, etc.) from the package.

75

2. Installation

3. Holding the grips on the machine, align it with the locating pin [A], and place the machine on the paper feed unit.

When you lift the machine, hold the correct locations. In particular, do not lift the machine by holding the scanner unit, etc., because this may cause the machine to deform. Do not put the machine down on the paper feed unit as a temporary resting place. This may cause the paper feed unit to deform. Always connect the machine and paper feed unit properly. 4. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray. 5. Using a securing bracket as a screwdriver, fix the machine to the feed unit (spring washer: screw: M410: 1).

76

Paper Feed Unit PB3150

6. Attach the securing brackets [A] to two positions on the left and right at the rear of the machine (screws: 1 each).

7. Return the paper feed tray to the machine. 8. Attach the decals as shown below.

[A]: Tray number decal [B]: Paper size decal The tray number decal and paper size decal are packaged together with the machine. 9. Connect the power cord to the machine. 10. Turn the power switch ON. 11. Set the paper, and check that the paper size set in the paper feed tray is displayed on the operation panel.

77

2. Installation

12. Adjust the registration for the paper feed unit. SP1-002-004 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 3)

78

Caster Table Type M3

Caster Table Type M3

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 4 COVER:RIGHT:LOWER BRACKET:COUPLING SCREW:M4X10 SCREW:SPRING WASHER:ROUND POINT:M4X10 Description Qty 1 2 2 1

Installation procedure

The machine must be held at the correct locations, and must be lifted slowly. If it is lifted with force, handled carelessly or dropped, it will result in an injury. If installing this option, turn the power to the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket. If it is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or malfunction. Be sure to join the machine and caster table to prevent equipment from falling over. If it is not joined, the machine will move or fall over, which will result in an injury.

79

2. Installation

How to place MFP on the caster table

1. Attach the 3 locating pins.

2. Holding the grips on the machine, align with the locating pin, and place the machine on the caster table. When you lift the machine, hold the lifting handles. In particular, do not lift it by holding the scanner unit, etc., (as it may deform). . Do not put the machine down on the caster table as a temporary resting place. This may cause the machine to deform. Always connect the machine and caster unit properly. 3. Pull out the 2nd paper feed tray. 4. Using a securing bracket, fix the machine to the paper tray unit (spring washer : screw: M410: 1). 5. Attach the securing brackets [A] at 2 positions to left and right at the rear of the machine (screws: 1 each). 6. Return the paper feed tray to the machine.

How to place the Paper Feed Unit PB3150 on the caster table
1. Attach the 3 locating pins. 2. Place the paper feed unit on the caster table. 3. Pull out the 1st paper feed tray of the paper feed unit. 4. Using a securing bracket, fix the caster table to the paper tray unit (spring washer : screw: M410: 1). 5. Attach the securing brackets at 2 positions to left and right at the rear of the machine (screws: 1 each). 80

Caster Table Type M3

6. Return the paper feed tray to the machine. 7. Holding the grips on the machine, align with the locating pins of the paper feed unit, and place the machine on the paper feed unit.

81

2. Installation

Platen Cover PN2000

Accessory Check
Check that you have the accessories indicated below. No. 1 2 3 4 COVER:PRESSURE PLATE SHEET:PRESSURE PLATE:ASS'Y SUPPORTER:FEELER GUIDE PIN:PRESSURE PLATE:HINGE Description Qty 1 1 1 2

Installation Procedure

Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.

82

Platen Cover PN2000

1. Install the stepped screws ( 2).

2. Install the feeler guide [A].

3. Install the platen cover [A].

83

2. Installation

4. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass. 5. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass.

6. Close the platen cover. 7. Open the platen cover. 8. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the platen cover securely.

84

ARDF DF3090

ARDF DF3090
Accessory Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description TAPPING SCREW:3X6 SCREW:POSITIONING:HINGE SCREW:HINGE:INNER BACK FULL DUG POINT SCREW:FIX:HINGE Stamp DECAL:CAUTION:ORIGINAL:MANY LANGUAGES Qty 2 1 1 2 1 1

Installation Procedure

Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. 1. All tapes and shipping retainers.

85

2. Installation

2. Insert the two stud screws ([A] is the larger stud, [B] is the smaller stud).

3. Mount the ARDF [A] by aligning the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws. 4. Slide the ARDF toward the front of the machine. 5. Secure the ARDF with the two knob screws [C].

6. Align the rear left corner of the platen sheet [A] with the corner [B] on the exposure glass. 7. Close the ARDF.

86

ARDF DF3090

8. Open the ARDF and check that the platen sheet is correctly attached.

9. Lift the ARDF original tray. 10. Slide the stamp holder [A] out and install the stamp cartridge in it, if necessary.

After the stamp installation, be sure to slide the holder in correctly. If not, jam detection (J001) will occur.

87

2. Installation

11. Attach the decals [A] [B] to the top cover as shown. Choose the language that you want.

12. Scanner rear cover [A] ( 3)

88

ARDF DF3090

13. Connect the harness [A].

14. Attach the bracket [A] ( 1)

15. Fasten the grounding wire [A] ( 1)

16. Attach the rear cover.

89

2. Installation

17. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the machine, and then check the ARDF operation. 18. Make a full size copy. Check that the registrations (side-to-side and leading edge) and image skew are correct. If they are not, adjust the registrations and image skew (see ARDF Image Adjustment in the "Replacements and Adjustments" chapter).

When feeding thin paper

When feeding thin paper, adjust the sliding tray to the point shown below [A]. When feeding normal paper, adjust the sliding tray to the point shown below [B]. If not, it may cause problems as follows: Original jam Original curl Originals cannot be stacked neatly

90

1 Bin Tray BN3110

1 Bin Tray BN3110

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 4 5 TRAY:SUPPORT:ASS'Y TRAY:EXIT:ASS'Y GEAR:Z22 COVER:TRAY TAPPING SCREW:ROUND POINT:3X8 Description Qty 1 1 1 1 2

Installation Procedure

When installing this option, turn the machine power off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket. If it is installed with the power on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.

If you install this option together with Side Tray Type M3, first install this option, and then install Side Tray Type M3.

91

2. Installation

When installing 1 Bin Tray BN3110 on the main frame, install the tray support bar unit and end fence in advance. 1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers. 2. Remove the enclosed items (fixing screws, etc.). 3. Open the right cover. 4. Main power switch cover [A] ( 1). Remember that there is a tab at the positions in the blue circles.

5. Paper output tray [A].

6. Open the front cover.

92

1 Bin Tray BN3110

7. Upper left cover [A] ( 1).

8. Left rear cover [A] ( 2).

93

2. Installation

9. Inverter tray [A], tray support rod cover [B] ( 1).

10. Paper output cover [A] ( 1).

94

1 Bin Tray BN3110

11. Attach the gear [A] provided.

12. Attach the 1 bin tray unit [A] ( 1,

2).

Take care that the harness is not trapped between the 1 bin tray unit and the machine frame.

95

2. Installation

13. Attach the harness provided.

14. Attach the tray support bar [A] ( 1). Take out the harness attached in the previous step from the position in the blue circle.

96

1 Bin Tray BN3110

15. Hook the 1 bin tray [A] onto the 1 bin tray unit, aligning the positions in the blue circles.

16. Connect the harness to the 1 bin tray, and bring it around.

97

2. Installation

17. Insert the tray support bar firmly in the 1 bin tray, and attach the harness cover [A].

18. Attach the left rear cover, upper left cover and main power switch cover, and close the duplex unit. 19. Turn the power switch ON. 20. Check that output to this tray can be selected on the operation panel, and check operation.

98

Internal Shift Tray SH3070

Internal Shift Tray SH3070

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 COVER:SHIFT TRAY LEVER:EXIT:ASS'Y SHEET:PAPER EXIT SUB-UNIT Description Qty 1 1 2

Installation procedure

When installing this option, turn the power to the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket. If it is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction. 1. Remove the filament tape and packing material. 2. Remove the enclosed items.

99

2. Installation

3. Attach the part [B] to the shift tray [A].

4. Paper output tray [A].

100

Internal Shift Tray SH3070

5. Connector cover [A].

6. Attach the shift tray.

7. Open the right cover. 8. Main power switch cover [A] ( 1). Remember that there is a claw at the positions in the blue circles.

101

2. Installation

9. Paper output cover [A] ( 1).

10. Attach the shift tray feeler [A].

102

Internal Shift Tray SH3070

11. Cut the aperture for paper out cover.

12. Attach the sheets [A] at the edge of the paper output cover.

13. Attach the paper output cover and main power switch cover, and close the duplex unit. 14. Turn the power switch ON. 15. Check that paper output to the shift tray can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation.

103

2. Installation

Side Tray Type M3

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 TRAY:LEFT:EXIT EXTENSION TRAY:LEFT:EXIT EXTENSION TRAY:EXIT:UPPER STAY:COUPLING SCREW:M4 TAPPING SCREW:3X8 TAPPING SCREW:4X10 BRACKET:RIGHT FRONT Description Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

104

Side Tray Type M3

Installation procedure

When installing this option, turn the power to the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket. If it is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.

The side tray cannot be used together with Internal Shift Tray SH3070. To use together with the 1 Bin Tray BN3110, attach the 1 Bin Tray BN3110 first before installing the side tray. 1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers. 2. Remove the enclosed items (fixing screws, etc.). 3. Paper output tray [A].

4. Open the right cover. 5. Main power switch cover [A] ( 1). Remember that there is a claw at the positions in the blue circles.

105

2. Installation

6. Connector cover [A].

7. Attach the bracket [A] ( 1).

8. Attach the main power switch cover, and close the duplex unit.

106

Side Tray Type M3

9. Attach the side tray unit [A] to the machine, and fix with a knob screw. ( 1).

10. Attach the fixing plate [A] ( 1).

11. Attach the upper extension tray [A] and the left extension tray [B].

12. Turn the power switch ON. 107

2. Installation

13. Check that paper output to the side tray can be selected at the operation panel, and check the operation.

108

Internal Finisher SR3130

Internal Finisher SR3130

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Staple Cartridge Front Right Cover Caster Stand Bottom Plate Left Lower Cover Entrance Guide Plate Screw - M3 6 Tapping Screw M4 x 6 Decal - EMC Address Description Qty 1 1 2 1 1 1 6 1 1

Installation Procedure

When you install this option, turn off the power to the machine, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket.

109

2. Installation

If it is installed with the power on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.

Cannot be used together with Internal Shift Tray SH3070, Side Tray Type M3. To use together with the 1 Bin Tray BN3110, after attaching the bottom plate of this option, attach the 1 Bin Tray BN3110, and then install this option. To use together with the Punch Unit PU3040, first attach the Punch Unit PU3040 before installing this option. 1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.

2. Remove the package items (fixing screws, etc.). 3. Open the front cover. 4. Paper output tray [A].

110

Internal Finisher SR3130

5. Upper left cover [A] ( 1).

6. Left rear cover [A] ( 2).

111

2. Installation

7. Inverter tray [A], tray support plate [B].

8. Open the right cover. 9. Main power switch cover [A] ( 1). Remember that there is a claw at each location in the blue circles.

112

Internal Finisher SR3130

10. Paper output cover [A] ( 1).

11. Connector cover [A].

12. Paper output lower cover [A] ( 3).

113

2. Installation

13. Upper rear inner cover [A] ( 2)

14. Install a screw [A] removed in step 12.

114

Internal Finisher SR3130

15. While pressing the bottom plate [A] into the area shown by the blue circle [B], insert it into the slot shown by the blue circles [C][D] ( 3).

The following procedure is the easiest way to set this component. 1) Slip the bottom plate [A] into the position in the blue circle [B]. 2) Insert the bottom plate [A] into the hole in the blue circle [C]. 3) When the bottom plate [A] is picked up (see below), it can be inserted into the hole in the blue circle [D].

115

2. Installation

16. Attach the upper rear inner cover. 17. Attach the paper output cover. Up to this point, the procedure is the same as punch unit installation (for fitting the punch unit, refer to Step 3 and later of the Punch unit installation procedure). 18. Attach the connector cover. 19. Attach the main power switch cover, and close the right cover. 20. Slide the finisher right front cover [A] from left to right to attach it ( 1).

21. Attach the inverter tray.

116

Internal Finisher SR3130

22. Attach the entrance guide plate [B] to the finisher [A] ( 2).

23. Slide the finisher [A] along the rail of the bottom plate from the left-hand side of the machine to attach it ( 1).

Hold the front side [A] of the inner finisher as shown below to check if the inner finisher is correctly set in the rail of the bottom plate. 24. Attach the left rear cover.

117

2. Installation

25. Insert the upper left cover [A] from the front, and slide it to attach it.

26. Attach caster stands [A]. Because the weight is biased to the right of the machine if the inner finisher is installed, caster stands are required on the left side. Because they are included with the finisher, install these components at the same time as you install the inner finisher.

118

Internal Finisher SR3130

27. Connect the interface cable to the machine.

28. Move forward the stapler unit, then set the staple cartridge [A].

29. Turn the power switch on. 30. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel, and check the finisher operation. Also when punch unit is installed, check the punching operation. 119

2. Installation

Punch Unit PU3040

Accessory Check
No . 1 2 3 4 5 Description TONER HOPPER:ASS'Y COVER:FRONT:PUNCH UNIT:ASS'Y COVER:TRAY:LOWER FRONT COVER:TRAY:LOWER REAR HOLDER:LOCK:RELEASE:PUNCH SCREW:M3X6 KNOB SCREW:M3 Qty 1 1 1 1 1 3 1

120

Punch Unit PU3040

Installation Procedure

When installing this option, turn the power to the machine off, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket. If it is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.

When supplied together with the Internal Finisher SR3130, attach this option before installing the Internal Finisher SR3130 If the Internal Finisher SR3130 is already attached, attach this option after removing the finisher. 1. Take out from the box, and remove the filament tape and packing material. 2. Remove the finisher and finisher front right cover from the machine. 3. Perform steps 1 to 17 of the installation procedure for the "Internal finisher SR3130". 4. Change the fixing position of the bracket [A] of the bottom plate ( 1).

121

2. Installation

5. Replace the lock holder of the bottom plate with the lock holder [A] provided ( 1).

6. Attach the main power switch cover. 7. Pass the shafts [B] of the punch unit [A] through the bearings [C] of the bottom plate, and attach to the machine ( 1, knob screw). If it is difficult to insert by probing, look from the side while you insert it into the bearings of the bottom plate.

122

Punch Unit PU3040

8. When installing the punch unit in a finisher that is already installed, remove the relay guide plate [A] ( 2).

This step is unnecessary when installing the finisher and punch unit at the same time.

123

2. Installation

9. Attach the front right cover [A] provided, inserting the claws ( 1).

10. Insert the hopper [A].

124

Punch Unit PU3040

11. Slide the finisher [A] along the rail of the bottom plate from the left-hand side of the machine to attach it ( 1).

12. Attach the components [A] and [B] to the finisher ( 2).

13. Attach the left rear cover 14. Insert the upper left cover [A] from the front, and slide it to attach it.

125

2. Installation

15. Attach stabilizers [A]. Because the weight is biased to the right of the machine if the inner finisher is installed, anti-tip components are required on the left side. Because they are included with the finisher, install these components at the same time as you install the inner finisher.

16. Connect the interface cable to the machine.

126

Punch Unit PU3040

17. Move forward the stapler unit, then set the stapler [A].

18. Turn the power switch on. 19. Check that the finisher can be selected at the operation panel, and check the finisher and punch operation.

127

2. Installation

Internal Finisher SR3180

Accessory Check
No . 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Description PLATE:ACCESSORY:ASS'Y COVER:ACCESSORY:ASS'Y TRAY:EXIT:ASS'Y TAPPING SCREW:3X8 TAPPING SCREW:3X8 TAPPING SCREW:3X8 SCREW:M3X6 TAPPING SCREW:3X6 Bracket Qty 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 1 1

128

Internal Finisher SR3180

Installation procedure

When you install this option, turn off the power to the machine, and unplug the power plug from the wall socket. If it is installed with the power on, it will result in an electric shock or a malfunction.

Cannot be used together with Internal Shift Tray SH3070 and Side Tray Type M3. For using this option together with 1 Bin Tray BN3110, attach the bottom plate of this option at the beginning, then install the 1 Bin Tray BN3110, followed by installing this option. 1. Remove the orange tape and shipping retainers.

2. Remove the screw securing the unit ( x 1).

129

2. Installation

3. Remove the shaft [B] from the slide rail [A] ( x 1).

4. Paper output cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Place the slide rail [A] under the internal finisher [B].

130

Internal Finisher SR3180

6. Insert the shaft [A] into the holes located in the slide rail and internal finisher, and then fasten with the screw ( x 1).

7. Attach the paper output cover (removed in step 4) [A] ( x 2).

8. Open the front cover.

131

2. Installation

9. Paper output tray [A]. (Take hold of the claw with your fingers)

10. Left upper cover [A] ( x 1).

11. Left rear cover [A] ( x 2).

132

Internal Finisher SR3180

12. Inverter tray [A], tray support plate [B].

13. Open the duplex unit. 14. Main power switch cover [A] ( x 1). Remember that there are three claws at the blue-circled positions.

133

2. Installation

15. Paper output cover [A] ( x 1).

16. Connector cover [A].

17. Paper output lower cover [A] ( x 2). The lower inside cover can be removed together with the paper output lower cover, since the inside cover is secured on the paper output lower cover with two screws.

134

Internal Finisher SR3180

18. Remove the lower inside cover [B] from the paper output lower cover [A] ( x 2).

19. Upper inside cover [A] ( x 2).

135

2. Installation

20. Insert the bottom plate [A] into the hole inside.

21. Install the bottom plate [A] ( x 3, Accessory No. 7).

22. Install the lower inside cover (removed in step 13) [A] in the finisher ( x 2, Accessory No.5).

136

Internal Finisher SR3180

23. Install the upper inside cover (removed in step 19) [A] ( x 2).

24. Attach the tray support plate (removed in step 12) [A].

25. Install the paper output cover (removed in step 14 and step 15) [A] and the connector cover [B]. Touching the moving parts inside of the cover can result in an injury. To avoid this, be sure to install the connector cover [B].

137

2. Installation

26. Attach the upper inside cover [A] and finisher [B].

27. Secure the finisher ( x 1, Accessory No.8).

138

Internal Finisher SR3180

28. Attach the cover ( x 2, Accessory No.6).

29. Fix the paper output tray ( x 2, Accessory No.4).

30. Reattach all the removed covers.

139

2. Installation

31. Connector cover [A] (Release the claw).

32. Connect the interface cable.

33. Turn the power ON. 34. Ensure that the operation panel displays finisher jobs properly and that it works properly.

Staple setting as an initial setting

To adjust the strength of crimp between sheets of paper stapled, there is a setting which makes single/ double staple changeable into each other. The power of crimp is weakened when there is an image (toner) on the point where is to be stapled. There also is a setting to mask the image on the point for staple, in order to avoid the strength of crimp to be weakened. Depending on users demands, explain the settings/ methods of the settings by checking the following instruction.

140

Internal Finisher SR3180

<How to change the setting of Staple Method (Single/ Double) for Stapleless Stapler> 1. [User Mode/ counter] 2. [System Setting] 3. [General Setting] and [next] 4. [Stapling Method for Stapleless Stapler]

<How to set Margin Erase for Stapleless Stapler> 1. [User Mode/ counter] 2. [System Setting] 3. [General Setting ] and [next] 4. [Erase Margin for Stapleless Stapler]

141

2. Installation

Anti-Condensation Heater
Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure. Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses. Check that harnesses are not damaged or pinched after installation.

Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner)

This option is provided as a service part. If you want to install Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner), D7390072 (heater for scanner) and D7390502 (electrical part) should be ordered.

Accessory Check
< Heater for scanner > Description SCREW:M3X3 HEATER:230V:9W BRACKET:DEHUMIDIFIER:HEATER < Electrical part > Description TAPPING SCREW:3X6 CLAMP:LWSM-0605A PCB:DHB HARNESS:SCANNER:PCU:HEATER:EXP HARNESS:DC:HEATER:DHB HARNESS:AC:HEATER:DHB:EU Qty 3 4 1 1 1 1 Qty 2 1 1

142

Anti-Condensation Heater

Installation procedure
1. Remove the power supply box (page 405). 2. Remove the HVP-CB unit (page 406). 3. Route the combined Blue/White harness.

The harness will connect to the relay unit. See the details in step 5. 4. Re-install the HVP-CB unit and power supply box.

143

2. Installation

5. Secure the relay board to the main machine and connect the Blue/White harness to the socket on the board ( 2).

6. Connect the harnesses on the relay board to the sockets on the PSU. Two types of harnesses are packed with the heater. Both the Blue/White one [A] and the Gray one [B] must be connected as below.

144

Anti-Condensation Heater

7. Route the harness around the outside of the PSU and pull the harness out of the electrical box through the hole [A] ( x 4).

8. Route the harness in the direction of the scanner (

x 5).

145

2. Installation

9. Route the harness in the rear side of the scanner.

Do not connect the harness at this time. It will be connected in a later procedure. 10. Rear right cover (page 231). 11. Scanner rear cover (page 232). 12. Exposure Glass (page 252). 13. Move the carriage to the center. 14. Attach the bracket [A] to the left side of the scanner.

146

Anti-Condensation Heater

15. Install the scanner heater [A] ( 2).

16. Route the harness while inserting into the claw.

147

2. Installation

17. Pull the harness out of the frame hole.

18. Connect the harness with the other harness shown in step 9.

19. Reattach all the removed covers.

Anti-Condensation Heater (PCDU)

This option is provided as a service part. If you want to install Anti-Condensation Heater (PCDU), D7390117 (heater for PCDU) and D7390502 (electrical part) should be ordered.

Accessory Check
< Heater for PCDU >

148

Anti-Condensation Heater

Description TAPPING SCREW:WASHER:3X8 HEATER:PHOTOCONDUCTOR:EU:ADHESION DECAL:H-TEMP WARNING:HEATER:OPTION < Electrical part > Description TAPPING SCREW:3X6 CLAMP:LWSM-0605A PCB:DHB HARNESS:SCANNER:PCU:HEATER:EXP HARNESS:DC:HEATER:DHB HARNESS:AC:HEATER:DHB:EU

Qty 1 1 1

Qty 3 4 1 1 1 1

Installation procedure
1. Remove the power supply box (page 405). 2. Remove the HVP-CB unit (page 406).

149

2. Installation

3. Route the combined Blue/White harness.

The harness will connect to the relay unit. See the details in step 5. 4. Re-install the HVP-CB unit and power supply box. 5. Secure the relay board to the main machine and connect the Blue/White harness to the socket on the board ( 2).

150

Anti-Condensation Heater

6. Connect the harnesses on the relay board to the sockets on the PSU. Two types of harnesses are packed with the heater. Both the Blue/White one [A] and the Gray one [B] must be connected as below.

7. Route the harness around the outside of the PSU and pull the harness out of the electrical box through the hole [A] ( x 4).

151

2. Installation

8. Route the harness in the direction of the scanner (

x 5).

9. Route the harness in the rear side of the scanner.

Do not connect the harness at this time. It will be connected in a later procedure. 10. Remove Feed Trays 1 and 2.

152

Anti-Condensation Heater

11. The connecter cover located inside the machine [A] ( 1).

12. Temporarily tighten a screw at the top.

13. Install the heater [A] by connecting the connecter to the inside of the machine, then tighten the screw completely. Hold the heater against the inside during final tightening.

153

2. Installation

14. Re-install the connecter cover ( 1). 15. Reassemble the machine.

154

Key Counter Bracket Type M3

Key Counter Bracket Type M3

Accessory Check
TBA

Installation procedure
1. Scanner right cover. 2. Make a screw hole in the removed scanner right cover with a screwdriver or drill.

3. Attach the tray bracket [A] to the scanner right cover ( [B] 2: M3x10). For this model, use the screw holes marked "1" on the table bracket.

155

2. Installation

4. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( 2: M3x8). 5. Attach the upper tray [B] to the tray bracket ( 1: M3x8). 6. Use the clamps as necessary to clamp the cable of the card read/writer device.

156

Key Counter Bracket Type M3

The smart card reader must be placed on this card reader table. If not, some antenna or transmitter in the main machine may be interrupted.

157

2. Installation

Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A

Accessory Check
No. Description TAPPING SCREW:3X6 WIRE BINDER 12.7MM:V-0 CLAMP:LWS-0711Z HARNESS:IOB:MKB Qty 4 1 4 1 1

Installation procedure

When you install this option, switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet. If installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or malfunction.

Key Counter
1. Rear right cover (page 231)

158

Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A

2. After attaching the clamp provided, attach the counter interface board [A] ( 4)

3. Connect the harness of the MFP to the upper connector (white/13 pin) [A]. Do not use the harness provided for the interface cable.

159

2. Installation

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739-36)

Accessory Check
Description Smart card reader cover Lower cover Double-faced adhesive tape Clamp Smart card reader/writer USB cable Qty 1 1 2 3 1 1

Installation Procedure
1. Open the right cover. 2. Main power switch cover [A] ( 1)

160

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739-36)

3. Replace the upper cover [A] of the main power switch cover [B] with the lower cover for the smart card reader built-in unit ( x2, 2 hooks).

4. Pass the USB cable [A] for the smart card reader through the hole in the lower cover [B], and then attach the main power switch cover to the main machine ( x1).

5. Attach the smart card reader stand to the lower cover [A] (2 hooks).

161

2. Installation

6. Attach two strips of double-faced adhesive tape [A] on the smart card stand [B].

7. Scanner rear cover [A] ( 3)

8. Scanner right cover [A] ( 1)

9. Place the smart card reader/writer [A] on the smart card reader stand.

162

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739-36)

10. Connect the USB cable [B] to the smart card reader/writer. Make a loop with the USB cable when connecting.

11. Attach the smart card reader cover on the smart card reader/writer.

12. Attach the clamps [A] on the right side of the scanner unit, and then route the USB cable ( x3).

13. Route the USB cable along the rear side of the scanner unit (

x1).

Adjust the USB cable by making loops if the USB cable has too much slack.

163

2. Installation

14. Remove the cutout [A] in the left rear cover to make a cable hole, and then pass the USB cable [B] through it.

15. Connect the USB cable to the USB slot (the left side).

16. Reattach the scanner right cover [A] ( 1). 17. Reattach the scanner rear cover [A] ( 3). 164

Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 (D739-36)

18. Close the right cover.

165

2. Installation

Imageable Area Extension Unit Type M3

Accessory Check
No. Description TRANSFER ROLLER:SECOND:OPTION:ASS'Y Qty 1

Installation Procedure

Do not touch the roller surface during replacement. 1. Change the value of SP2-400-001. SP SP2-400-001 Description Paper Transfer Roller Settings Width of Paper Transfer Roller Default 0 Setting 1

When SP2-400-001 is changed over, a message is displayed stating Switch the power OFF/ON. 2. After you changed the value of this SP, turn the power off. 3. Replace the roller.

[A]: Standard roller [B]: Imageable Area Extension Unit Type M3 166

Imageable Area Extension Unit Type M3

During PM replacement, do not install the wrong type of roller. 4. Turn the power on. 5. Using SRA3 paper, check that a full-bleed halftone image is output, and that the image extends to 315 mm in width.

When you forgot to change the SP

The following problems occur. When a change-over was made from a standard roller to the imaging range extension option (If the SP setting is the normal setting (SRA3 paper not supported), but the optional longer paper transfer roller is installed) The image cannot be correctly transferred to the SRA3 paper area. MUSIC/program control pattern adheres to the ends of the paper transfer roller (outside the A3 area), and this can transfer to the underside of printouts. Real-time process control cannot be performed correctly, and an abnormal image and SC285-00 (MUSIC error) may occur. When a change-over was made from the imaging range extension option to a standard roller (If the SP setting is for SRA3, but the paper transfer roller is the normal one (SRA3 paper not supported)) Real-time process control is not performed, and the interval between process controls becomes short. The waiting time for fusing temperature rise is longer than intended.

167

2. Installation

Internal Options
List of Slots

Slot [A] I/F slot A*1 Fax Option Type M3

Option

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A File Format Converter Type E [B] I/F slot B IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2*3 RC-GATE/LB Color Controller Connection Board Type M3 [C] USB port*2 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D*4 Smart Card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2

*1 Dedicated slot for fax unit *2 Smart card Reader Built-in Unit Type M2 is only available on the left USB port; Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D is available on both the left and right USB ports.

168

Internal Options

*3 IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2 cannot be used together with Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D. *4 Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D cannot be used together with IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2.

169

2. Installation

IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit Velcro Fasteners Clamps Description Qty 1 2 8

Since disassembly/alteration of a wireless LAN board is illegal, during service replacements, replace the whole PCB assembly. Be sure to give the leaflet provided to the customer.

Installation procedure

When you install this option, Switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet.

Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There is a possibility that the extension wireless LAN board may malfunction due to static electricity.

170

IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2

* When using wireless LAN (IEEE802.11 b/g/n:2.4-GHz band), this radio product uses the 2.4GHz band. Check that industrial, scientific and medical devices using the same frequency bands, such as a microwave oven and cordless telephone, are not used nearby. If there is interference, communication may become unstable. Check that there are no devices likely to cause interference in the surrounding area.

Attaching the boards

1. I/F slot B [B] ( 2) covers.

2. Attach the extended wireless LAN board to a slot ( 2) Press the extended wireless LAN board firmly in, and check it is firmly connected. The customer should keep the I/F card slot covers which were removed.

Attaching the antenna

1. Stick the fastener provided on the antenna case. Stick the fastener provided on the lower half (cable side) of the case. It can be stuck to either side of the antenna case.

171

2. Installation

2. Attach the 2 antennas to the rear cover of the MFP. The two antennas must be attached at least 12 cm apart from each other. 3. Stick 8 cable stickers on the rear face of the MFP. 4. Fix the cable. Take care to loop it around so that it does not interfere with other options or I/F cables. 5. Switch the power supply ON. 6. Check that the system settings list is output, and the option is recognized correctly.

Settings
Check the connection of the wireless LAN interface
1. Check the IPv4 address and subnet mask, or IPv6 address setting of the MFP. 2. Press the [Default setting/counter] key. 3. Press the [System default setting] button. 4. Choose [Wireless LAN] in [Interface setting].

172

IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit Type M2

5. Set each item, and press the [Setting] button.

For details, refer to instructions for use. (Check instructions for use, Network connection/System default setting "Wireless LAN interface connection") If the extended wireless LAN board does not work correctly, refer to the leaflet provided in the options box.

173

2. Installation

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A

Accessory Check
No. PCB:IEEE1284:ASS'Y Description Qty 1

Installation procedure

When you install this option, Switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet.

Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There is a possibility that the IEEE 1284 Interface Board may malfunction due to static electricity. 1. I/F slot B [B] ( 2) covers.

2. Attach the IEEE 1284 Interface Board to the I/F slot ( 2)

174

IEEE 1284 Interface Board Type A

3. Check that the system settings list is output, and that the board is recognized correctly. The customer should keep the I/F card slot covers which were removed.

175

2. Installation

File Format Converter Type E

Accessory Check
No. 1 PCB:MLB32:ASS'Y Description Qty 1

Installation procedure

When you install this option, switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet.

Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There is a possibility that the board may malfunction due to static electricity.

176

File Format Converter Type E

1. I/F slot A [B] ( 2) covers

2. Set the File Format Converter in an I/F slot ( 2) 3. Check the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly. The customer should keep the I/F card slot covers which were removed.

177

2. Installation

Copy Data Security Unit Type G

Accessory Check
No. 1 2 3 4 PCB:ICIB-3 BRACKET:ICIB:ALEX SCREW:M3X4 SCREW:M3X6 TAPPING SCREW:3X8 SPACER:SQ-7 BRACKET:ICIB:GRIFFIN-C1 Description Qty 1 1 2 4 2 1 1

Installation procedure

When you install this option, switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet. If it is installed when the power is on, it will result in an electric shock or malfunction. 1. Rear cover (page 230)

178

Copy Data Security Unit Type G

2. Attach the copy data security module [A] to the IPU ( 2,

1 (CN581)).

The Copy data security unit [A] must be connected directly to the CN581 in the IPU.

3. Attach the rear cover.

Settings (to be done by the user)

Equipment administrator settings
In order to validate administrator authentication, select [YES] in administrator authentication management settings. When the setting is validated, the initial-setting item currently assigned to each administrator will be the administration item. 1. Press the [Default setting/counter] key. 2. Press the [System default setting] button. 3. Press the [Administrator settings] button. 4. Press the [Next] button. 5. Press the [Administrator authentication management] button.

179

2. Installation

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D

Accessory Check
No. 1 MODULE:BLUETOOTH:USB CD-ROM:BLUETOOTH:OI:EXP:ASS'Y Description Qty 1 1

Installation procedure

When you install this option, switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet.

Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury. Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the body. There is a possibility that the wireless interface board may malfunction due to static electricity.

180

Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D

1. Attach the BT wireless interface to the USB-A slot [A].

There is no difference between the left and right USB ports. 2. Check the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly.

181

2. Installation

SD Card Option
SD Card Slots

[A]: SD card slot 1 (option slot) [B]: SD card slot 2 (service slot)

List of Slots Used

Optional SD cards can be set in either slot 1 or slot 2. But slot 2 is the service slot, so we recommend that you use slot 1 to install the SD card options.

182

SD Card Option

Name Postscript3 Unit Type M3 IPDS Unit Type M3 Camera Direct Print Card Type M3 SD card for Netware printing Type M3 Fax Connection Unit Type M3 Browser Unit Type M9 OCR Unit Type M2

Data Capacit y (MB) 128 128 128 128 128 128 128

Sourc e

Destinatio n

Remarks Optional SD cards can be set and used in either slot 1 or slot 2. "Memory Unit Type M3 2GB" must be installed before installing "Browser Unit Type M9"

In this machine, it is possible to transfer data from a "Postscript3 Unit" SD card, unlike in earlier models, due to a change in the software licensing (the part of the Postscript software that requires licensing is now built into the controller, so the portion on the SD card can be moved to another SD card).

183

2. Installation

SD Card Appli Move

Overview
Since there are only two SD card slots (one of them is a service slot), three or more SD card applications cannot be used simultaneously. However, if multiple SD card applications are merged, three or more SD card options can be used. This function is referred to as the SD card merge function. The SD card merge function is a function which enables the use of three or more functions within the capacity of two SD cards by physically transferring the function of one SD card to other SD cards (all SD card options can be stored in two SD cards). However, SD card applications are under license, therefore, since an SD card license after merge is transferred to the target SD card, it cannot be used even if it is moved to the target machine. Also, a process to prevent illegal copying is performed. After merge, store the empty SD card in the location shown below. 1. Unlock the lever [A], and then open the right cover [B].

184

SD Card Appli Move

2. Main power switch cover [A].

3. Insert the SD card in the storage location [A] inside the cover.

Move Exec
1. Turn the power off.

185

2. Installation

2. SD card slot cover [A] ( 1).

3. Set the destination SD card (SD card where data is to be stored) in Slot 1 [A], and set the original SD card (SD card from which data is to be transferred) in Slot 2 [B].

4. Turn the power on, and press [ENTER] in SP5-873-001 (SD Card Appli Move: Move Exec). 5. When a confirmation screen is displayed, press [ENTER] (it takes about 2 - 3 minutes). If [CANCEL] is pressed, the display returns to the previous screen. Note that if the power supply is turned off, a panel operation is performed, or the cover is opened during merge, it will result in a malfunction. 6. When merge is complete, and the following screen is displayed, press [CLOSE]. If the process is terminated abnormally, perform the merge in SP mode again. If the capacity of the destination SD card is insufficient, the merge operation cannot be performed. 186

SD Card Appli Move

1. Press [END] twice. 2. Turn the power off. 3. Remove the empty SD card after transfer from Slot 2. 4. Attach the slot cover( 1). 5. Turn the power on, output the system setting list, and check that the options are recognized correctly.

Undo Exec
This is a recovery function if an application is incorrectly transferred to a different device of the same model. 1. Turn the power off. 2. SD card slot cover [A] ( 1).

3. Set the integrated SD card in Slot 1. 4. Set the SD card which became empty after integration in Slot 2. 5. Turn the power on, and press [ENTER] in SP5-873-002 (SD Card Appli Move: Undo Exec). 6. When a confirmation screen is displayed, press [ENTER]. If [CANCEL] is pressed, the display returns to the previous screen. Note that if the power supply is turned off, a panel operation is performed, or the cover is opened during cancellation, it will result in a malfunction. 7. When cancellation is complete, press [CLOSE]. 8. Press [END] twice. 9. Turn the power off.

187

2. Installation

10. Attach the SD card slot cover ( 1). 11. Turn the power on, and check that the application has been deleted.

188

Data Overwrite Security Unit Type H (D377)

Data Overwrite Security Unit Type H (D377)

Overview
This option should be installed only for the customer who requires the CC certified Data Overwrite Security function. The function of this option is completely the same as the Data Overwrite Security in Security Functions, which is standard on this machine. (page 69)

Component List
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list. No. 1. SD Card Description Qty 1

Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine. The correct type for this machine is "Type H" 2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values: Supervisor login password Administrator login name Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.

189

2. Installation

3. Make sure that Admin. Authentication is ON. [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin. Authentication] If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation procedure. 4. Make sure that Administrator Tools is enabled (selected). [System Settings] [Administrator Tools] [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available Settings] If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.

Seal Check and Removal

You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removed after the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do the installation. 1. Check the box seals [1] on each corner of the box. Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner. The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see VOID on the tapes, do not install the components in the box. 2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show VOID, remove them from the corners of the box. 3. You can see the VOID marks [2] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they cannot be attached to the box again. 190

Data Overwrite Security Unit Type H (D377)

Installation Procedure
1. Insert the SD card (DataOverwriteSecurity Unit) in SD slot 1 (upper) [A] with its label face towards the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 1 (upper) until you hear a click.

2. Install the application using SP5-878-001.

191

2. Installation

Camera Direct Print Card Type M3

Accessory Check
No. 1 Description SD-CARD:P-BRIDGE:METIS-C1:EXP:ASS'Y Qty 1

Installation procedure
1. SD card slot covers [B] ( 1)

192

Camera Direct Print Card Type M3

2. Put the camera direct print card in SD card slot 1 [A].

When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. 3. Switch the power ON. 4. Attach the SD card slot cover. ( 1) 5. Stick the "PictBridge" sticker on the front face of the MFP. 6. After switching the power ON, check that the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly.

193

2. Installation

Browser Unit Type M9

Accessory Check
No. 1 SD Card Description Qty 1

Installation procedure
The browser unit uses a native application such as a full browser in order to improve web browsing. Also, to provide a solution utilizing the web as in previous machines, Extended JavaScript is also provided as an SDK application. Due to the above, the browser unit for this model has two firmware modules, native application firmware, and Type-C application EXJS firmware. The browser for these models is not installed in the SD card HDD, but in order to start up using the data on the SD card, it must be operated with the SD card inserted.

In addition to link-up with the conventional Scan Router and MFP, the browser unit has the following functions.

194

Browser Unit Type M9

"Memory Unit Type M3 2GB" must be installed before installing "Browser Unit Type M9". If "Memory Unit Type M3 2GB" is not installed, the machine will not work well due to insufficient memory. For scanning, arbitrary distribution types and preset values are selected and delivered. Mail is delivered (login transmission) to an address previously set in the profile of the user who logged in. 1. Switch the power OFF. 2. SD card slot cover [A] ( 1)

3. Insert the browser unit card in SD card slot 1 [A].

195

2. Installation

When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. 4. Switch the power ON. 5. Press the [Default setting/Counter] key. 6. Press the [Extension function default setting] button. 7. Press the [Extension function default setting] button on the [Extension function default menu setting] screen. 8. On the [Startup setting] tab, check that "Extended JS" was installed automatically and has started. 9. Switch the power OFF/ON. 10. Press the [Default setting/Counter] key. 11. Press the [Home editing] button. 12. Press the [Add icon] button. 13. Press the [Browser] button displayed on the Application tab. 14. Select the position at which [Blank] is displayed, and press the [OK] button. 15. Check that the [Browser] icon has been added to the Home screen.

Settings
Browser default setting
Register the browser default settings. For details, refer to the following. 1. Switch ON the power. 2. Press the [Default settings/counter] key. 3. Press the [Browser default settings] button. 4. Press the [Home screen] button on the Browser Settings tab. 5. Press the [URL input] button. 6. Input the URL, and press the [OK] button. 7. Press the [Settings] button. 8. Press the [End] button twice, and finish.

196

SD card for NetWare printing Type M3

SD card for NetWare printing Type M3

Accessory Check
No. 1 Description SD-CARD:NETWARE:MET-C1:EXP:ASS'Y Qty 1

Installation procedure
1. SD card slot covers [B] ( 1)

197

2. Installation

2. Put the SD card for NetWare printing in SD card slot 1 [A].

When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. 3. Switch the power ON. 4. Attach the SD card slot cover. ( 1) 5. After switching the power ON, check that the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly.

198

OCR Unit Type M2

OCR Unit Type M2

This option adds a searchable PDF function to the scanning function.

Accessory Check
No. 1 Description SD-CARD:OCR:MET-C1:EXP:ASS'Y Qty 1

Searchable PDF function outline

The searchable PDF function performs OCR by the MFP on a document read with the scanner, and embeds text data in the PDF. This permits PDF text browsing, automatic assignment of filenames, and automatic alignment of document orientation. This option is provided with an SD card. By installing an SD card in the MFP, a functional icon is added to the control unit. It is not necessary to install software in a PC. If this option is installed, various settings related to the searchable PDF function are available. After reading of the document is completed (after it is read by the ADF and output), OCR is performed. Therefore, after reading is completed, documents can be collected from the document glass or ADF. Other functions, such as the copy function and printer function, can be used during OCR.

Installation procedure

Switch the MFPs power supply OFF, and unplug the power plug from the mains outlet.

199

2. Installation

If the battery is replaced by the wrong type, there is a danger of explosion. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. 1. Remove the SD card slot covers [A] and [B] ( 1)

2. Insert the OCR module SD card in SD card slot 1 [A] or slot 2 [B].

3. Switch the power supply ON. 4. Press Enter in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary). The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card. The MFP and SD card are thereby linked.

200

OCR Unit Type M2

5. When operation complete is displayed, press "Close. If installation fails, "Failed" is displayed. If installation fails, perform the following steps. 1. Check whether it is a used SD card. 2. Switch the power OFF, and repeat steps 1-5. 6. Switch the power OFF/ON. 7. Press Enter in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary). Dictionary data is copied to the HDD. On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies dictionary data. 8. Switch the power OFF, and remove the SD card from the SD card slot. Keep the SD card in the SD card storage location of the MFP. The original SD card is needed in the event of a HDD malfunction. 9. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position. 10. Switch the power ON. 11. Press [File Format / File Name] on the scanner function screen. 12. Check that [OCR setting] is displayed on the File format / "File Name" screen. After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen. When setting OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])

201

2. Installation

Postscript3 Unit Type M3

Accessory Check
No. 1 Description SD-CARD:PS3:MET-C1:EXP:ASS'Y Qty 1

Installation procedure
1. SD card slot covers [B] ( 1).

202

Postscript3 Unit Type M3

2. Insert the PS3 SD card in SD card slot 1 [A].

When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation. 3. Switch the power ON. 4. Attach the SD card slot cover.( 1) 5. Stick the "Adobe PostScript3" decal on the front face of the MFP. 6. After switching the power ON, check that the system settings list is output, and that the option is recognized correctly. The PDF firmware installed as standard contains a program required to print PS3 data as default. However, this PS3 program is normally disabled. The PS3 firmware is a dongle (key) which enables PS3 data printing functions. When the PS3 firmware is installed, the PS3 program in the PDF firmware is enabled. Due to this specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM part number/software version of the PDF firmware contained in the PS3 program.

203

2. Installation

Security Function Installation

The machine contains the Security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) built into the controller board. If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit by selecting "Format All Data" from System Settings on the operation panel. This method is recommended because there is no user data on the hard drive yet (Address Book data, image data, etc.). If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit on a machine that is already running, it is recommended to activate the unit by selecting "All Data" from System Settings on the operation panel. Selecting "All Data" will preserve the data that has already been saved to the hard drive. (If "Format All Data" is selected, all user data saved to the hard drive up to that point will be erased). Immediately after encryption is enabled, the encryption setting process will take several minutes to complete before you can begin using the machine. If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the disk, or of the encryption key is changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more. The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted. Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped. Make sure that the machine's main power is not turned off while the encryption process is in progress. If the machine's main power is turned off while the encryption process is in progress, the hard disk will be damaged and all data on it will be unusable. Print the encryption key and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a paper sheet). Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and is needed, the controller board, hard disk and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time. "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board. "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BCU has nothing to do with this. Please use the following procedure when the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption is reinstalled.

204

Security Function Installation

Data Overwrite Security

Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure. 2. Make sure that Admin. Authentication is on. [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication] If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before you do the installation procedure. 3. Make sure that Administrator Tools is enabled (selected). [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings] If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected) before you do the installation procedure.

Installation Procedure
1. Connect the network cable if it needs to be connected. 2. Go into the User Tools mode, and select [System Settings] [Auto Erase Memory Setting] [On]. [Administrator Tools]

205

2. Installation

3. Exit the User Tools mode.

Icon [1]

This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting.

Icon [2]

This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

4. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon appears. 5. Check the overwrite erase icon. The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during overwriting. The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.

HDD Encryption
Before You Begin the Procedure
1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at the factory default settings. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password 206

Security Function Installation

These settings must be set up by the customer before the HDD Encryption unit can be installed. 2. Confirm that "Admin. Authentication" is on: [User tools/Counter] key -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Admin. Authentication] -> [On] If this setting is off, tell the customer that this setting must be on before you can do the installation procedure. 3. Confirm that "Administrator Tools" is selected and enabled. [User tools/Counter] key -> [System Settings] -> [Administrator Tools] -> [Administrator Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings] "Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done. If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure.

Enable Encryption Setting

1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key. 2. Press [System Settings]. 3. Press [Administrator Tools]. 4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].If this item is not visible, press [Next] to display more settings. 5. Press [Encrypt].

6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset. To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data].

207

2. Installation

To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only]. To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].

7. The following message will be displayed. Press the [Start] key to print the encryption key for safe keeping.

208

Security Function Installation

8. Press [Exit] to remove the following message.

9. Press [Exit] again. 10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key. 11. Turn the main power switch off and on. 12. "Memory Conversion complete. Turn the main power switch off" is displayed as below. Then turn the main power switch off and on.

209

2. Installation

13. Then initial operation display appears again. After this step, HDD data encryption has already been completed.

Check the Encryption Settings

1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key 2. Press [System Settings]. 3. Press [Administrator Tools].

210

Security Function Installation

4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings].

5. Please confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.

Print the encryption key

Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced. 1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key. 2. Press [System Settings]. 3. Press [Administrator Tools]. 4. Press [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. 5. Press [Print Encryption Key]. 6. Select [Save to SD card] or [Print on paper]

211

2. Installation

Encryption key sample

The encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the example shown above. Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place.

212

Memory Unit Type M3 2GB

Memory Unit Type M3 2GB

Accessory Check
No. 1 Description PCB:DDR3-DIMM:RC-A:2GB:ASS'Y Qty 1

Installation Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover (page 230). 2. DIMM [A] (Unlock).

3. Install the Memory Unit Type M3 [A].

4. Turn the power ON. 213

2. Installation

5. Output the system setting list to make sure that the memory unit is recognized properly.

214

3. Preventive Maintenance
PM Parts Settings
Replacement procedure of the PM parts
1. Enter the SP mode. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. 3. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. 4. Replace the PM parts and turn the power on, then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of developer, the developer initialization will also be done automatically. 5. Exit the SP mode. Item SP Black: 3701-002, 003 PCDU Yellow: 3701-071, 072 Cyan: 3701-025, 026 Magenta: 3701-048, 049 Black: 3701-003 Development unit Yellow: 3701-071, 072 Cyan: 3701-025, 026 Magenta: 3701-048, 049 Black: 3701-002 PCU Yellow: 3701-071, 072 Cyan: 3701-025, 026 Magenta: 3701-048, 049 Pressure Roller (not necessary for complete fusing unit and Heating sleeve belt unit; see below) Image Transfer Belt Unit Image Transfer Belt Cleaning Unit 3701-093 3701-102 Pressure roller: 3701-118

215

3. Preventive Maintenance

Item PTR Unit Exhaust Filter 3701-109 3701-132

SP

After the PM counter for the heating sleeve belt unit reaches its PM life (240K pages), the machine stops the operation automatically. Replace the heating sleeve belt unit before the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 244K pages, stop: 248K pages). For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset PM counters. Fusing unit Heating sleeve unit Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full) Even if you replace the new Toner Collection Bottle, PM counter will not reset soon (The machine judges whether PM counter should be reset or not after printing for some time). Even if you set SP3-701-142 or SP7-622-142, PM counter of Toner Collection Bottle will not reset.

After installing the new PM parts

1. Turn on the main power switch. 2. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004 and check the counter values. 3. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-944. If the PM counter for a unit was not reset, then reset that counter with SP 7-622. 4. Make sure that the exchange counter counts up with SP7-853. 5. Make sure that the counters for the previous units (SP7-908) on the new SMC logging data list (from step 2 above) are equal to the counters (SP7-803) for these units on the previous SMC logging data list (the list that was output in the "Before removing the old parts" section). 6. Make sure that the unit replacement date is updated with SP7-950.

Preparation before operation check

1. Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning). 2. Enter the user tools mode. 216

PM Parts Settings

3. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration(ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode as follows: Print the ACC test pattern (User Tools Maintenance ACC Start). Put the printout on the exposure glass. Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC adjustment. Close the ARDF or the platen cover. Press "Start Scanning" on the LCD. Then, the machine starts the ACC. 4. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode. 5. Perform line adjustment. SP2-111-004: Forced Line Position Adj. Mode d The result can be checked with SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result Execution Result) (0:Succeed, 1: Fail). Also, results for each color can be checked with SP2-194-010 to 013. 6. Exit the SP mode.

Operation check
Check if the sample image has been copied normally.

217

3. Preventive Maintenance

218

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes on the Main Power Switch
Push Switch
The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch (push button) from the conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.

Characteristics of the Push Switch (DC Switch)

Power is supplied to the machine even when the main power switch is turned OFF. The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC power cord is connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller board, the operation unit and other modules even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller board and the operation unit in this state, not only these boards, it will damage other electrical components. So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning off the main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord. When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine there is still residual charge. When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, inside the machine for a while there is still residual charge. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state, it can cause a blown fuse or memory failure. How to remove the residual charge inside the machine After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual charge from inside the machine, be sure to press the main power switch. Thus, the charge remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards. When you reconnect the AC power cord into an AC wall outlet, the machine will start automatically. In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch while you disconnect the AC power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish work on the machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press the main power switch, the machine will start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When working on moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.

219

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power cord or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically. In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing of releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch while the residual charge was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine manually by pressing the main power switch.

Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch [A] on the machine. 2. The shutdown message is displayed. Wait for 3 minutes for the machine to shut down. After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off automatically.

Before removing and adjusting electrical boards, do the following procedure. Otherwise, the board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine and must be replaced. 1. Take out the power cord after shutdown. 2. Press the power switch for a second to remove the residual charge inside the machine.

Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced shutdown function. 220

Notes on the Main Power Switch

To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch for 6 seconds. In general, do not use the forced shutdown. Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to the machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.

221

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Beforehand
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord. After replacing, make sure that all harnesses that were removed are connected up again and secured in their clamps.

222

Special Tools

Special Tools
The following special tools should be prepared for maintenance of the new model in the field: Item 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Part Number A1849501 B6455020 52039502 A2579300 C4019503 VSSG9002 A0929503 Description Scanner Positioning Pin (2 pcs/set) SD Card (1GB) Silicon Grease G-501 Grease Barrierta S552R 20X Magnification Scope FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE: 100G C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) Qty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

223

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Exterior Covers
The Aim of Anti-tip Components and Precautions The anti-tip components are necessary for meeting the requirements of IEC60950-1, the international standard for safety. The aim of these components is to prevent the products, which are heavy, from toppling as a result of people running into or leaning onto the products, which can lead to serious accidents such as persons becoming trapped under the product. (U.S.: UL60950-1, Europe: EN60950-1) Therefore, removal of such components must always be with the consent of the customer. Do not remove them at your own judgment.

Front Cover
1. Open the front cover [A].

224

Exterior Covers

2. Belt [A]

3. Front cover [A]

225

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Controller Cover
1. Controller cover [A] ( 4)

Upper Left Cover

Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and detaching.

1. Open the front cover. (page 224) 2. Paper exit tray (page 236) 3. Upper left cover [A] ( 1) Slide the cover in the direction of the blue arrow.

226

Exterior Covers

Left Rear Cover

1. Upper left cover (page 226) 2. Left Rear Cover [A] ( 2)

Left Cover

Each part enclosed by a blue circle has a tab. Be careful not to damage it when attaching and detaching.

227

4. Replacement and Adjustment

1. Controller cover (page 226) 2. Upper left cover (page 226) 3. Left rear cover (page 227) 4. Open the 2nd paper feed tray slightly.

5. Left cover [A] ( 5) Remove it while pressing down.

228

Exterior Covers

<Order to remove>

1. Paper exit tray 2. Controller cover 3. Ozone filter/Dust-shield filter box 4. Front cover

229

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Upper left cover 6. Left rear cover 7. 2nd paper feed tray 8. Left cover

Rear Cover

There is a claw (left-facing) on the back face of the rear cover. When fitting or removing the cover, take care not to damage it.

1. Controller cover (page 226) 2. Rear cover [A] ( 4)

230

Exterior Covers

Rear Right Cover

1. Rear cover (page 230) 2. Rear Right Cover [A] ( 3)

Rear Lower Cover

1. Rear cover (page 230) 2. Rear lower cover [A] ( 5)

231

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Rear Cover

1. Scanner rear cover [A] ( 3)

Scanner Rear Cover (Small)

1. Rear cover (page 230) 2. Scanner rear cover (Small) [A] ( 2)

Right Rear Cover

1. Open the right cover. (page 383)

232

Exterior Covers

2. Right rear cover [A] ( 4, Among them, tapping screw1)

When installing, insert the projections [A] in the holes [B], taking care not to trap the harness inside.

Right Upper Cover

1. Main power switch cover (page 234)

233

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Right upper cover [A] ( 2)

Main power switch cover

1. Open the right cover. (page 383) 2. Main power switch cover [A] ( 1)

Waste Toner Cover

1. Front cover (page 224)

234

Exterior Covers

2. Waste Toner Cover [A]

Reverse Tray
1. Reverse Tray [A]

235

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Exit Tray

1. Paper Exit Tray [A]

Paper Exit Cover

1. Main power switch cover (page 234) 2. Reverse Tray (page 235) 3. Paper exit cover [A] ( 1)

Paper Exit Lower Cover

1. Left rear cover (page 227) 2. Paper exit cover (page 236)

236

Exterior Covers

3. Connector cover [A].

4. Paper exit lower cover [A] ( 2)

Paper Exit Front Cover

1. Paper exit lower cover (page 236)

237

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Paper exit front cover [A] ( 4)

Inner Upper Cover

1. Open the front cover, and remove the belt. (page 224) 2. Open the right cover. (page 383) 3. Paper exit front cover (page 237) 4. Image transfer unit (page 293) 5. Inner upper cover [A] ( 4)

238

Exterior Covers

Inner Lower Cover

1. Front cover (page 224) 2. Inner upper cover (page 238) 3. PCDU front cover (Y) (page 281) 4. Inner cover: front: right-lower 5. Inner lower cover [A] ( 3)

239

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Operation Panel Unit

Operation Panel
1. Scanner front cover (page 251) 2. Operation panel upper cover [A]

240

Operation Panel Unit

3. Operation panel [A] ( 6,

2)

Board A
1. Operation panel (page 240) 2. Operation panel lower cover [A] ( 6)

241

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Harness guide [A] ( 2)

4. Bracket covers [A] [B]

242

Operation Panel Unit

5. Operation panel arm bracket [A] ( 6)

6. Board A [A] ( 8,

3)

Board B
1. Operation panel arm bracket (page 240)

243

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Board B [A] ( 4,

1, USB2)

Board C
1. Operation panel arm bracket (page 240) 2. Board C [A] ( 4, 1, USB2)

LCD Panel
1. Operation panel arm bracket (page 240)

244

Operation Panel Unit

2. Bracket [A] ( 6,

5, USB2)

3. LCD panel unit [A]

LCD
Notes when replacing the LCD
Since LCD panels from 3 vendors are used, the replacement parts differ depending on the vendor. When replacing, check the vendor used, and ensure that you use the correct part.

245

4. Replacement and Adjustment

The LCD panels are supplied by company S, company C and company A. Company S and As panels are interchangeable because they use parts with the same specification. Distinguishing method Of the 3 labels on the rear of the operation panel, the center label shows the LCD model number. Operation panel rear surface

[A]: Label attachment position Label

[A]: S Co. LCD: Printed as Sxxxxx... [B]: C Co. LCD: Printed as Cxxxxx... [C]: A Co. LCD: Printed as Axxxxx Differences between operation panels from 3 vendors Operation panel upper cover There is no difference in appearance, but there is a difference in internal layout. LCD bracket There is a difference in the shape of the bracket and the stamp inside the blue circle. S Co. / A Co.: SH stamp C Co.: CM stamp

246

Operation Panel Unit

Use of FFC (Flexible Flat Cable) For S Co. and A Co., FFC is used, but for C Co., instead of an FFC, a cable integrated with the LCD (orange) is used.

247

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Replacement procedure
1. Operation panel arm bracket (page 240) 2. Bracket [A] ( 6, 5, USB2)

248

Operation Panel Unit

3. LCD panel unit [A]

249

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Unit
When you replace the scanner wire, use the standard positioning pins.

Scanner Exterior
Scanner Upper Cover
1. Platen cover or ADF 2. Scanner rear cover (page 232) 3. Scanner Upper Cover [A] ( 2)

Scanner Right Cover

1. Scanner rear cover (page 232)

250

Scanner Unit

2. Scanner right cover [A] ( 1)

Scanner Front Cover

1. Scanner front cover [A] ( 2)

Scanner Left Cover

1. Left rear cover (page 227) 2. Scanner front cover (page 251)

251

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Scanner left cover [A] ( 3)

Exposure Glass
1. Open the platen cover or ADF, and remove the scale [A]. ( 3)

252

Scanner Unit

2. ADF exposure glass [A]

3. Rear scale [A] ( 3)

4. Left scale and exposure glass [A] The exposure glass and the left scale are attached with double-sided tape.

253

4. Replacement and Adjustment

When installing, please follow the points below: Set so that the blue mark [A] of the ADF exposure glass is on the left at the front of the operation panel. Set so that the locating hole of the left scale fits over the locating boss of the front/rear frame.

Exposure Lamp (LED)

1. Exposure glass (page 252)

254

Scanner Unit

2. Move the exposure lamp (1st scanner carriage) [A] to position [B].

3. Exposure lamp [A] ( 2,

1)

Scanner Motor
1. Scanner upper cover (page 250)

255

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. SIO unit [A] ( 2,

7)

3. Bracket [A] ( 4,

3)

256

Scanner Unit

4. Spring [A]

5. Scanner motor unit [A] ( 2,

1)

6. Scanner motor [A] ( 2)

257

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Lens Block
1. Exposure Glass (page 252) 2. Lens block cover [A] ( 2)

3. Lens block [A] ( 5,

2)

Original Size Sensor

1. Exposure glass (page 252) 258

Scanner Unit

2. Original size sensor [A] (

1)

When a screw driver is inserted, the tab can be removed smoothly.

SIO
1. Scanner rear cover (page 232) 2. Scanner upper cover (page 250) 3. Bracket [A] ( 1)

259

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. SIO [A] ( 4,

7)

Scanner HP Sensor
1. Scanner upper cover (page 250) 2. Exposure glass (page 252) 3. Slide the exposure lamp (1st scanner carriage) [A] in the direction of the arrow a little.

260

Scanner Unit

4. Peel off the sensor stopper [A].

5. Scanner HP Sensor [A] (

1)

DF Position Sensor
1. Scanner upper cover (page 250)

261

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. DF Position sensor [A] ( 1,

1)

Adjusting the Scanner Wire

Scanner Wire (Front)
1. Exposure glass (page 252) 2. Scanner right cover (page 250) 3. Operation panel (page 240) 4. Main power switch cover (page 234) 5. Lower bracket [A] of the operation panel ( 6, 3).

262

Scanner Unit

6. Scanner front frame [A] ( 6)

7. Move the 1st scanner carriage to the set position of the scanner fixing pin.

263

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Wire clamp [A] ( 1)

9. Wire fixing bracket [A], spring [B] ( 1)

10. Wire pulley [A] ( 1,

1)

264

Scanner Unit

Do not touch the mirror and the lamp. When you move the carriage, hold the central part and move it gently.

Scanner wire assembly (front side)

1. Pull the scanner wire ball end [B] to the pulley [A] from the left side of the pulley as shown in the diagram. 2. Set the ball [C] in the center part of the wire on the pulley. 3. Turn the ball end [D] 5 times counterclockwise along the edge on the rear side of the pulley. 4. Turn the ring end [E] 3.5times clockwise along the edge at the front side of pulley.

265

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Check that the blue marks [F] of the wire overlap, and secure it temporarily with Teflon tape, etc.

6. Set the pulley on the drive shaft [G] (tighten the screw temporarily). 7. Set the ball end of the wire in the following order. 1. Left frame pulley (outside) [H] 2. 2nd scanner carriage (outside) [I] 3. Left frame slit [J] 8. Set the ring end of the wire in the following order. 1. Right frame pulley (outside) [K] 1. 2nd scanner carriage (inside) [L] 2. Scanner retaining bracket [M] (Tighten the screw of the scanner retaining bracket temporarily) 9. Remove the tape which temporarily held the wire in Step 5. 10. Attach the spring.

266

Scanner Unit

Scanner position adjustment

1. Set the scanner positioning pins (4). 2nd scanner carriage and frame hole [A] 1st scanner carriage and frame hole [B] Same position as [A] on the rear side Same position as [B] on the rear side 2. Tighten the screw [C] of the pulley which was temporarily tightened. 3. Tighten the screw [D] of the scanner retaining bracket which was temporarily tightened. 4. Attach the wire clamp [E]. 5. Pull out the scanner positioning pins. 6. Holding the center part of the 1st scanner carriage, move it to the left and right to ensure it moves smoothly. If it does not move smoothly, loosen the scanner wire, and perform the scanner position adjustment procedure again. After replacing the wire, make a test copy, and check skew, magnification, and whether there is a registration gap. If there is a gap, adjust the scanner wire position again, or perform Scan Registration Adjustment (SP4010-SP4011). 267

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Scanner Wire (Rear)

1. Scanner right cover (page 250) 2. Scanner left cover (page 251) 3. Exposure glass (page 252) 4. Scanner motor (page 255) 5. Bracket [A] ( 7, 1)

268

Scanner Unit

6. Rear frame [A] ( 6)

7. Move to the set position of the fixing pin for the first carriage.

269

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Wire clamp [A] ( 1)

9. Wire fixing bracket [A], spring [B] ( 1)

10. Scanner drive gear [A] ( 1)

270

Scanner Unit

11. Remove the screw and the clip ring of the wire pulley (front) [A] and wire pulley (rear) [C], draw out the scanner drive shaft [B] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the wire pulley (rear) [C] ( 1, 2).

Scanner Wire Assembly (rear side)

271

4. Replacement and Adjustment

1. Pull the scanner wire ball end [B] to the pulley [A] from the right side of the pulley as shown in the diagram. 2. Set the ball [C] in the center part of the wire on the pulley. 3. Turn the ball end [D] 4.5 times clockwise along the edge on the rear side of the pulley. 4. Turn the ring end [E] 3.5 times counterclockwise along the edge at the front side of the pulley. 5. Check that the blue marks [F] of the wire overlap, and secure it temporarily with Teflon tape, etc. 6. Set the pulley on the drive shaft, and attach the scanner drive gear. 7. Attach the scanner wire on the rear side as in Step 7, attaching the scanner wire (front side).

Modifying the Scanner (contact/contactless) when using ARDF

Procedure for the ADF
1. ADF front cover [A] .( 1) Remove with the document table [B] lifted up.

272

Scanner Unit

2. Document reader guide plate [A].( 1)

3. Replace the contactless guide plate (front) [A] with the contact guide plate (front) [B]. ( 1) There is a hole in the contact guide plate (front).

273

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Replace the contactless guide plate (rear) [A] with the contact guide plate (rear) [B]. There is a hole in the contact guide plate (rear).

5. Attach the document reader guide plate. Be careful not to scratch the sheet [A].

6. Attach the ADF front cover, and return the ADF to its original position. 7. From the SP mode, change the DF density setting (SP4-688-001) from [102%] to [97%].

274

Scanner Unit

Procedure for the scanner

1. Remove the exposure glass, and peel off the sheet [A]

2. Wipe the exposure glass with alcohol, etc., so that no glue remains from the double-sided tape. Remember that if any glue remains, it will cause a paper jam in the ADF.

275

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Laser Unit
Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. Caution Decals

Decal Location

Laser Unit

A polygon motor protection bracket and a red label are attached to each new laser unit. Remove these before you install the new unit.

276

Laser Unit

Before Replacement
1. Polygon motor cover [A] ( 4)

2. Polygon motor bracket [A], Red tag [B] ( 3)

3. Reattach the polygon motor cover.

Removing
1. Left cover (page 227)

277

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Laser unit [A] ( 2,

4,

3)

Installing a New Laser Unit

1. Insert the new laser unit in the main body carefully. 2. Connect all harnesses except the skew correction motor harness [A] (2nd from right).

3. Reassemble the machine.

278

Laser Unit

Adjustment after replacing the laser unit

1. Close the front cover and attach the left cover. Attach the left cover before turning on the main switch. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes. 2. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 3. Download the data of the new laser unit to the main body with SP2-110-005. If it fails (see step 4 below), perform SP2-110-005 again. If it is not executed correctly, outputs will be abnormal (magnification and color registration errors), and SC 285 may occur. 4. Check that SP2-119-001 to 003 is "0." If it is not "0", perform SP2-110-005 again. 5. Turn off the main power switch and disconnect the power cord. 6. Remove the left cover and attach the skew correction motor harness [A].

7. Close the left cover. 8. Plug in and turn on the main power switch. 9. Set SP2-109-003 to 1, press Copy Window, and print. The 1-dot vertical line test pattern is printed. After outputting the 1-dot vertical line pattern, set SP2-109-003 to "0." Check that the space on either side is less than 41 mm. If it is not within these limits, change the reference value of the main scanning magnification adjustment (SP4-011-001). 279

4. Replacement and Adjustment

10. Perform line adjustment. SP2-111-004: Forced Line Position Adj. Mode d The result can be checked with SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result Execution Result) (0: Succeed, 1: Fail). Also, results for each color can be checked with SP2-194-010 to 013. 11. Exit the SP mode.

Polygon Motor
1. Polygon motor cover (page 276) 2. Polygon motor holder [A], Polygon motor [B] ( 5, 1)

Adjustment after replacing the polygon motor

SP2-111-004: Forced Line Position Adj. Mode d The result can be checked with SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result Execution Result) (0: Succeed, 1: Fail). Also, results for each color can be checked with SP2-194-010 to 013.

280

PCDU

PCDU
PCDU
Before replacing the PCDU
Each PCDU has two components: a drum unit and a development unit. Before replacing a PCDU, set SP3-701 to "1" for the PCU that you will replace, and again for the development unit that you will replace. Then switch the power OFF. Then replace the PCDU and switch the power ON.

Replacement
1. Open the front cover [A].

2. Remove the ITB front cover [A] ( x 1). The screw for the ITB front cover is shorter than the screws for the PCDU cover. Pay attention to use proper screw(s) when attaching these covers.

281

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Remove the PCDU cover.

[A] [B] [C] [D]

Y M C K

x1 x1 x1 x1

282

PCDU

4. Release the lock for the ITB contact/separation lever [A].

5. Remove the PCDU.

[A] [B] [C] [D]

Y M C K

x 1, x 1, x 1, x 1,

x1 x1 x1 x1

PCU/Development Unit
Before replacing a PCU

Before replacing a PCU, do the procedure shown below. The main points are as follows. Input the charge voltage correction value for the new PCU. 283

4. Replacement and Adjustment

The machine will optimize SP settings related to imaging using process control, after you input the charge voltage correction value and replace the PCU. 1. Set SP3-701: New PCU detection to 1 before replacing the PCU. 2. Check the charge voltage correction value printed on the label attached to the new PCU. This value is adjusted for each PCU. It is not necessary to input the correction value when installing a complete brand-new PCDU.

A B C D E

Bar code PCU Lot No. Correction value Last three digits of SP number SP No.

1. Input the value (located at [C] on the decal as shown above) into the correct SP2-005 as shown below. SPs for charge voltage correction before replacing PCU SP No. K C M Y SP2-005-235 SP2-005-236 SP2-005-237 SP2-005-238

284

PCDU

1. Turn the power OFF. 2. After replacing the PCU, turn the power ON. (Process control is done automatically.) If you replaced the PCU without inputting the correction value, do the following procedure. Case 1: When you set SP3-701 to 1 1. Input the PCU correction value. 2. Execute process control manually with SP3-011-001 in order to adjust the machine settings with the PCU correction value. Note that if you replaced the PCU using the proper procedure mentioned above, process control starts automatically. Case 2: When you did not set SP3-701 to 1 1. Set SP3-701 to 1. 2. Input the PCU correction value. 3. Turn the power OFF. Note that process control will start automatically.

Before replacing a Development Unit

Before replacing the Development Unit, set SP3-701: New Development Unit detection to 1, and switch the power OFF. Then replace the development unit and switch the power ON. Doing the replacement in the wrong order will clear the PM counter and the remaining counter of the PCU.

Replacement
1. PCDU (page 281) 2. Release the connecting part (front) [A] ( x 2) and harness [B].

285

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Cover [A] ( x 1).

Pay attention not to break the plate (the red arrow). Handle with care to prevent deformation of the plate. Deformation can cause unstable images due to contact failure. Be sure to attach this cover to the PCDU and install the PCDU in the main frame.

286

PCDU

4. Connecting part (rear) [A] ( x 3).

5. Separate PCU [A] and development unit [B].

When separating the PCU and development unit, the drum may come off and this could cause a toner spillage. Hold the PCU [A] with the drum side up as shown below to prevent toner spillage.

287

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Notes for assembling PCU/Development unit

Pay close attention not to spill any toner on the charge roller when assembling. Remove the heat seal [A] after replacing the PCDU. Remove the cap [B] pasted on the toner port when replacing the PCDU.

Method for checking after replacement

Before installing, rotate the drum in the blue arrow direction, to ensure that toner lines do not occur.

288

PCDU

Imaging Temperature Sensor (Thermistor)

1. Open the controller box (page 317) 2. Connector [A]

289

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Imaging temperature sensor harness guide [A] and Imaging temperature sensor [B] ( 2)

290

Waste Toner

Waste Toner
Replacement
1. Open the waste toner cover [A]. Push the blue circle area, then open the cover.

2. Pull out the waste toner bottle [A].

Adjustment after replacing

The counter for the Waste Toner Bottle is reset automatically. 291

4. Replacement and Adjustment

The counter isn't reset with SP3-701-142 (Manual New Unit Set: Waste Toner Bottle) and SP7-622-142 (PM Counter reset: Waste Toner Bottle).

292

Image Transfer Unit

Image Transfer Unit

Image Transfer Belt Unit

Note that if the two levers [A] are not pointing up, the image transfer belt unit cannot be inserted. Before you remove or attach the image transfer belt unit, remove the duplex unit and open the paper transfer unit. Do not touch the rollers but hold the upper/lower resin part [A] when you lift the Image Transfer Unit. Touching the rollers may cause poor image quality.

293

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Adjustment before replacing the image transfer belt unit

Before replacing the Image Transfer Belt unit, set SP3-701-093 to "1" and switch the power OFF. Then replace the Image Transfer Belt unit and switch the power ON.

Replacement
1. Open the front cover. (page 224)

294

Image Transfer Unit

2. Image transfer front cover [A] ( 1)

3. Release the lock [A] and open the right cover [B].

295

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Pull the handle [A] and open the paper transfer unit [B].

5. Release the ITB lock lever [A] and ITB contact lever [B].

6. Image Transfer Belt Unit [A] To prevent the image transfer belt unit from falling out, there is a lock mechanism. After pulling out the image transfer belt unit fully, lift the handle [B] to release the lock, and remove image transfer belt unit. 296

Image Transfer Unit

Locking mechanism by handle

Image Transfer Cleaning Unit

When removing the image transfer cleaning unit, to prevent scattering of toner, remove it so that the image transfer cleaning unit is underneath the image transfer belt unit.

297

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Adjustment before replacing the image transfer cleaning unit

Before replacing the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning, set SP3-701-093 to "1" and switch the power OFF. Then replace the Image Transfer Belt Cleaning and switch the power ON.

Replacement
1. Image transfer unit (page 293) 2. Image transfer lock unit [A] ( 3, Among them, stepping screw 1)

298

Image Transfer Unit

3. Remove the screw above the image transfer cleaning unit [A] ( 2).

4. Turn the whole image transfer belt unit over, and remove the screw below the image transfer cleaning unit ( 2).

299

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. While releasing the hook, lift the image transfer belt unit gently, and remove the image transfer cleaning unit.

6. Put toner on the image transfer belt.

[A]: 20mm or more [B]: About 5mm 7. Attach the image transfer cleaning unit.

300

Image Transfer Unit

8. Rotate the image transfer belt about 10mm [A] in the reverse direction, then turn it forward one complete turn [B].

Image Transfer Belt

Replacement

Do not touch the rollers but hold the upper/lower resin part [A] when you lift the Image Transfer Unit. Touching the rollers may cause poor image quality.

1. Image transfer unit (page 293)

301

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Bracket [A] ( 1)

3. Brackets [A] [B] ( 4)

4. Image transfer cleaning unit (page 297) 5. Remove the tension fixing frames [A] and [B] (front side: black, rear side: gray).

302

Image Transfer Unit

6. Position the image transfer unit with the front side underneath.

7. Rotate the gear [A] to change to the OPEN position.

303

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Release the tension and remove the belt.

Adjustment after replacing the Image transfer belt

After replacing the image transfer belt, to prevent twisting of the belt, pass the belt round once in the direction of the arrow.

304

Image Transfer Unit

Paper Transfer Roller

1. Open the paper transfer roller unit. (page 293) 2. Paper transfer roller [A]

Paper Transfer Roller Unit

Adjustment before replacing the paper transfer roller unit
Before replacing the Image Paper Transfer Roller Unit, set SP3-701-109 to "1" and switch the power OFF. Then replace the Image Paper Transfer Roller Unit and switch the power ON.

Replacement
1. Open the right cover. (page 293) 2. After removing the clip ring and connector on the rear side, open the paper transfer roller unit, remove the clip ring at the front side, and remove the paper transfer roller unit [A] ( 2, 1). Note that the sizes of the clip ring differ on the left and right.

When attaching a paper transfer roller unit, first attach the stops [B] to the paper transfer roller unit.

305

4. Replacement and Adjustment

306

Image Transfer Unit

Fusing Entrance Sensor

1. Open the right cover. (page 293)

307

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Fusing entrance sensor unit [A] ( 1,

1)

3. Fusing entrance sensor [A]

TM (ID) Sensor
Before Replacing the TM(ID) sensor
Each sensor assembly has a list of characteristic values attached to it. Before you replacing the TM / ID sensor, you must do the following procedure, or process control/MUSIC will not be done correctly after power is switched on (it will use the values for the old sensor).

308

Image Transfer Unit

The characteristic values attached to the service part must be entered before replacement. It is recommended that in case Process control/MUSIC after replacement is not completed successfully, take a note of values of SP3-333,SP3-334,SP3-335. 1. Note the characteristic values that are listed on the bar code label.

TM/P Sensor (front): F, TM/P Sensor (center): C, TM/P Sensor (rear): R, be careful. 2. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode. 3. Input the characteristic values. Input data for TM/P Sensor: F into SP3-333. Input data for TM/P sensor: C into SP3-334. Input data for TM/P sensor: R into SP3-335. SP No. 3-333-00 1 3-333-00 2 3-333-00 3 3-333-00 4 3-333-00 5 3-333-00 6 3-334-00 1 Classification 1 ID.Sens TestVal:F ID.Sens TestVal:F ID.Sens TestVal:F ID.Sens TestVal:F ID.Sens TestVal:F ID.Sens TestVal:F ID.Sens TestVal:C Classification 2 K2: Check Diffuse Corr Vct_reg Check:Slope Vct_reg Check:Xint Vct_dif Check:Slope Vct_dif Check:Xint K2: Check Value TM/P sensor: F, value of [1] TM/P sensor: F, value of [2] TM/P sensor: F, value of [3] TM/P sensor: F, value of [4] TM/P sensor: F, value of [5] TM/P sensor: F, value of [6] TM/P sensor: C, value of [1]

309

4. Replacement and Adjustment

SP No. 3-334-00 2 3-334-00 3 3-334-00 4 3-334-00 5 3-334-00 6 3-335-00 1 3-335-00 2 3-335-00 3 3-335-00 4 3-335-00 5 3-335-00 6

Classification 1 ID.Sens TestVal:C ID.Sens TestVal:C ID.Sens TestVal:C ID.Sens TestVal:C ID.Sens TestVal:C ID.Sens TestVal:R ID.Sens TestVal:R ID.Sens TestVal:R ID.Sens TestVal:R ID.Sens TestVal:R ID.Sens TestVal:R

Classification 2 Diffuse Corr Vct_reg Check:Slope Vct_reg Check:Xint Vct_dif Check:Slope Vct_dif Check:Xint K2: Check Diffuse Corr Vct_reg Check:Slope Vct_reg Check:Xint Vct_dif Check:Slope Vct_dif Check:Xint

Value TM/P sensor: C, value of [2] TM/P sensor: C, value of [3] TM/P sensor: C, value of [4] TM/P sensor: C, value of [5] TM/P sensor: C, value of [6] TM/P sensor: R, value of [1] TM/P sensor: R, value of [2] TM/P sensor: R, value of [3] TM/P sensor: R, value of [4] TM/P sensor: R, value of [5] TM/P sensor: R, value of [6]

Replacement procedure
1. Image transfer belt unit (page 293) 2. Paper transfer roller unit (page 305) 3. Fusing unit (page 340) 4. Fusing dowser position sensor unit (page 356)

310

Image Transfer Unit

5. TM(ID) sensor unit [A] ( 2,

3,

5)

When installing the TM / ID sensor unit. 1. Attach the screw of the front side [B] 2. Attach the screw of the back side [C] When installed in reverse order, an SC may occur because the sensor position has shifted.

6. TM(ID) sensor [A] ( 6)

Adjustment after replacing the TM(ID) sensor

1. Turn on the main power switch, and then go into the SP mode. 311

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Run SP3-011-004 (Manual Procon: Exe Full MUSIC). If the SP3-011-004 can't finish successfully, make sure you are entering the correct value to the SP.

Temperature and Humidity Sensor

1. 1st and 2nd paper tray (page 366) 2. Right lower cover ( x1)

3. Temperature and humidity sensor bracket ( x1)

312

Image Transfer Unit

4. Temperature and humidity sensor (

x1, x1)

ITB Contact and Release Sensor

1. PCDUs (page 281) 2. ITB contact and release sensor bracket [A] ( 2)

313

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. ITB contact and release sensor [A]

314

Drive Unit

Drive Unit
Overview

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Description Paper Feed Motor Transport Motor Registration Motor Paper Exit / Pressure Release Motor Fusing Motor

No. 6 7 8 9 10

Description Paper Transfer Contact Motor PCU Motor: CMY Development Motor: CMY Development Solenoid PCU: Black / Image Transfer Motor

315

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Feed Motor

1. Power supply box (page 405) 2. Paper Feed Motor [A] ( 2, 1)

Transport Motor
1. Power supply box (page 405) 2. Transport motor [A] ( 2, 1)

316

Drive Unit

Transfer Motor Unit

1. Rear right cover (page 231) 2. Scanner rear lower cover (page 232) 3. Bracket [A] [B] ( 2)

4. Bracket [A] ( 3)

317

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Controller box [A] ( 8,

16,

17, USB1)

6. Paper transfer contact motor unit [A] ( 2)

Imaging Drive Unit

1. Paper transfer contact motor unit (page 317) 2. Power supply box (page 405)

318

Drive Unit

3. Bracket [A] ( 4)

1. Ground plate [A] ( 2) 2. Toner supply fan air duct [A] ( 3)

3. PCU motor: Color (page 320) 4. Development motor: CMY (page 320) 5. Development solenoid (page 320) 6. Transfer drum motor (page 317) 7. Imaging IOB (page 402)

319

4. Replacement and Adjustment

8. Imaging drive unit [A] ( 9,

1)

PCU Motor: CMY

1. Controller box (page 317) 2. Color PCU motor [A] ( 4, 1)

Development Motor: CMY

1. Bracket (page 318) 2. Color Development motor [A] ( 4)

Development solenoid
1. Controller box (page 317) 2. Power supply box (page 405)

320

Drive Unit

3. Solenoid cover [A] ( 2)

4. Development solenoid [A] ( 2,

1, spring1)

PCU: Black / Image Transfer Motor Bracket (page 318) PCU: Black / Image Transfer Motor [A] ( 4)

Registration Motor 321

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Power supply box (page 405) Drive cooling fan. Registration motor [A] ( 2, 1)

Fusing Motor
1. Rear right cover (page 231) 2. Fusing motor [A] ( 4, 1)

Paper Exit / Pressure Release Motor

1. Fusing exhaust heat fan (page 414)

322

Drive Unit

2. Paper exit / Pressure release motor [A] ( 2,

1)

Duplex Entrance Motor

1. Paper exit unit (page 359) 2. Fusing exhaust heat fan (page 414) 3. Duplex entrance motor unit [A] ( 3, 2)

323

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Duplex entrance motor [A] ( 2)

Toner Transport Motor

1. Controller box (page 318) 2. Toner transport motor

[A] [B] [C] [D]

K C M Y

2, 2, 2, 2,

1 1 1 1

324

Drive Unit

Sub Hopper
K
1. Pull out the image transfer unit about 5cm. 2. Controller box. (page 317) 3. Toner transport motor unit (K) [A] ( 3)

4. Sub hopper (K) [A]

C
1. Pull out the image transfer unit about 5cm. 2. Controller box. (page 317)

325

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Harness guide [A] ( 2)

4. Toner transport motor unit (C) [A] ( 1)

5. Hopper (C) [A]

326

Drive Unit

M
1. Controller box (page 317) 2. Harness guide [A] ( 2)

3. Toner transport motor unit (M) [A] ( 3)

327

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Hopper (M) [A]

Y
1. Harness guide (page 327) 2. Toner transport motor unit (Y) [A] ( 3)

328

Drive Unit

3. Hopper (Y) [A]

Toner End Sensor

1. Hopper (page 325) 2. Toner end sensor [A]

329

4. Replacement and Adjustment

The toner end sensor, there is no difference between each color.

Toner Bottle Drive Motor

K
1. Toner transport motor (K) (page 324) 2. Toner bottle drive motor (K) [A] ( 2)

C
1. Toner transport motor (C) (page 324) 2. Toner bottle drive motor (C) [A] ( 2)

330

Drive Unit

M
1. Toner transport motor (M) (page 324) 2. Toner bottle drive motor (M) [A] ( 2)

Y
1. Toner transport motor (Y) (page 324) 2. Toner bottle drive motor (Y) [A] ( 2)

ID Chip
K
1. Toner bottle drive motor (K) (page 330) 331

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Toner bottle drive motor (C) (page 330) 3. ID chip (K) [A] ( 2)

C
1. Toner bottle drive motor (C) (page 330) 2. Toner bottle drive motor (M) (page 331) 3. ID chip (C) [A] ( 2)

M
1. Toner bottle drive motor (M) (page 331)

332

Drive Unit

2. Toner bottle drive motor (Y) (page 331) 3. ID chip (M) [A] ( 2)

Y
1. Toner bottle drive motor (Y) (page 333) 2. ID chip (Y) [A] ( 2)

333

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Transport screw
Y
1. Image transfer unit (page 293) 2. PCDU (page 281) 3. Toner Bottle Drive Motor (page 330) 4. Sub hopper (page 325) 5. ID chip (page 331) 6. Put a piece of disposable paper [A] on the inside of the machine to avoid damage due to toner spillage.

7. Put a piece of disposable paper [A] under the transport screw to avoid damage due to toner spillage.

334

Drive Unit

8. Remove all the harnesses connecting to the transport screw unit (

8).

9. Remove the screws fixing the transport screw units [A] ( 5, each color).

10. Release the claws for the transport screw units [A] (claw 1, each color).

335

4. Replacement and Adjustment

11. Remove the screws securing the bracket [A] ( 2).

12. Put a piece of disposable paper on the floor because toner can spill when you put the transport screw unit down. 13. Pull out the whole transport screw unit [A] together with the bracket [B].

Be sure to put a piece of disposable paper on the floor because toner can spill when you put the transport screw unit down.

336

Drive Unit

14. Transport screw unit for (Y) [A] (claw1).

M
1. See steps 1 to 13 in the transport screw replacement procedure for Y (page 334). 2. Transport screw unit for (M) [A] (claw1).

337

4. Replacement and Adjustment

C
1. See steps 1 to 13 in the transport screw replacement procedure for Y (page 334). 2. Transport screw unit for (C) [A] (claw1).

K
1. See steps 1 to 13 in the transport screw replacement procedure for Y (page 334).

338

Drive Unit

2. Transport screw unit for (K) [A] (claw1).

339

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Unit
Fusing Unit
Adjustment before replacing the fusing unit

Because there is a danger of burns on contact with hot parts of the fusing unit, start work when the temperature drops to a low enough temperature. To cancel SC544-02/554-02, it is necessary to replace the fusing unit or install the old one with an intact new unit detection fuse. If you cancel the SC by replacing the fusing unit, follow the instruction below. 1. Install the new fusing unit (Do not install a previously installed unit because the machine will check it is a new part or not with the new unit detection fuse). 2. Execute SP5-810-002 (SC Reset: Hard High Temp. Detection). 3. Execute SP3-701-115 (Manual New Unit Set: #Fusing unit). A spare fuse is packed with the heating sleeve unit. For how to cancel the SCs by installing a new fuse, see the explanation at the end of the replacement procedure for the Heating sleeve unit (page 347).

When the fusing unit is used past its target yield (400k), the fusing unit may break, causing a service call. Therefore, the machine displays a warning on the operation panel at 415k pages and stops at 430k pages. The fusing unit for replacement has a function that detects a new part, so it does not require a PM counter reset on SP mode.

Replacement
1. Open the paper transfer unit. (page 293)

340

Fusing Unit

2. Fusing unit [A] ( 2)

To attach the fusing unit, fasten the screws in the order [B] (rear), [C] (front).

Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

Replacement
1. Fusing unit (page 340) 2. Fusing entrance guide plate [A] ( 2)

341

4. Replacement and Adjustment

The screw [B] is a threaded screw. When you assemble the unit, take care not to use the wrong screws. Attach the fusing entrance guide plate on the outer of the two screw holes.

Cleaning the Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

Carefully remove toner adhering as shown in the diagram below with a dry cloth. Then, wipe with a cloth moistened with alcohol.

Fusing Exit Guide Plate

Replacement
1. Fusing unit (page 340) 2. Fusing upper cover (page 344) 3. Fusing exit guide plate [A] 1. Open the fusing exit guide plate in the direction of the arrow 1. 2. Remove the fusing exit guide plate in the direction of the arrow 2.

342

Fusing Unit

Cleaning the Fusing Exit Guide Plate

1. Open the fusing exit guide plate [A].

2. Wipe clean with a dry cloth. Then wipe clean with a cloth dampened with alcohol.

343

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Fusing Upper Cover

1. Fusing unit (page 340) 2. Fusing upper cover [A] ( 4)

Fusing Lower Cover

1. Fusing unit (page 340)

344

Fusing Unit

2. Fusing lower cover [A] ( 4)

Fusing Front Cover

1. Fusing unit (page 340)

345

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Fusing front cover [A] ( 3)

Fusing Rear Cover

1. Fusing unit (page 340) 2. Gear [A] ( 1), Fusing rear cover [B] ( 2)

346

Fusing Unit

Heating sleeve unit

Replacement

The heating sleeve unit is designed with a highly soft material. Do not touch the sleeve belt unit with your hands to prevent dents during replacement. If you have touched it and a dent has been made, the dent will gradually become larger during operation and it can cause a fusing malfunction or sleeve belt breakage.

To cancel SC544-02/554-02, it is necessary to replace the fusing unit or install an intact new unit detection fuse. If you will cancel these SCs by installing a new unit detection fuse, follow the instruction at the end of this procedure. If you are replacing the heating sleeve unit for PM or any reason other than canceling these SCs, you can discard the fuse that is packed with the new heating sleeve unit. 1. Fusing upper cover (page 344) 2. Fusing lower cover (page 344) 3. Fusing front cover (page 345) 4. Fusing rear cover (page 346) 5. Exit guide plate (left) unit [A] ( 2)

347

4. Replacement and Adjustment

6. Left frame [A] ( 4,

4)

7. Side plate [A] ( 1)

348

Fusing Unit

8. Heating sleeve unit [A] ( 4)

Be careful not to touch the temperature sensor unit [A] against the heating sleeve unit when installing the electrical unit in the fusing unit.

349

4. Replacement and Adjustment

How to cancel SC544-02/SC554-02 with a new unit detection fuse

To cancel SC544-02/554-02, it is necessary to replace the fusing unit or install an intact new unit detection fuse. If you will cancel these SCs by installing a new unit detection fuse, follow the instruction below. If you are replacing the heating sleeve unit for PM or any reason other than canceling these SCs, you can discard the fuse that is packed with the new heating sleeve unit. 1. There is a new unit detection fuse packed with the new heating sleeve unit.

2. Connect the new unit detection fuse to the connector.

350

Fusing Unit

3. Pass the fuse harness through the slit located next to the connector (blue arrow) and place the fuse in the empty space (blue circle).

4. Execute SP5-810-002 [SC Reset: Hard High Temp. Detection]. 5. Execute SP3-701-116 [Manual New Unit Set: #Fusing Belt].

Pressure Roller
Adjustment before replacing the pressure roller
Before replacing the Pressure Roller, set SP3-701-118 to "1" and switch the power OFF. Then replace the Pressure Roller and switch the power ON.

Replacement

Do not remove or adjust the pressure adjusting screws [A] when replacing the pressure roller. The fusing unit is adjusted in the factory to match the hardness of the pressure roller, so that the nip width will be correct, so please do not release the pressure adjustment screw.

351

4. Replacement and Adjustment

This screw is adjusted in the factory for the correct nip width, to match the hardness characteristics of each roller. Do not adjust the pressure adjustment screw in the field. Also, do not move the pressure roller to another fusing unit. 1. Heating sleeve unit (Heating sleeve unit) 2. Pressure roller [A] (C-ring 2)

352

Fusing Unit

3. Apply the grease (FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE) to the rear shaft of the pressure roller at 5-7mm from the cut edge.

4. Apply the grease (FLUOTRIBO MG GREASE) to the front shaft of the pressure roller at 5-7mm from the C-ring notch.

Thermostat Unit
1. Left frame (Heating sleeve unit)

353

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Thermostat unit [A] ( 2)

Non-contact Thermistor Unit

1. Left frame (Heating sleeve unit) 2. Non-contact Thermistor unit [A] ( 2, 2)

354

Fusing Unit

Fusing Thermistor
1. Fusing upper cover (page 344) 2. Fusing lower cover (page 344) 3. Fusing thermistor (edge) [A], fusing thermistor (center) [B] ( 2, 2, 1)

Fusing Thermopile Unit

1. Fusing unit (page 340) 2. Fusing thermopile unit [A] ( 2, 2)

355

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Pressure Roller HP Sensor

1. Fusing unit (page 340) 2. Pressure roller HP sensor unit [A] ( 1, 1)

3. Pressure roller HP sensor [A]

Fusing Shield Position Sensor

1. Fusing unit (page 340)

356

Fusing Unit

2. Fusing shield position sensor unit [A] ( 1,

2)

3. Fusing shield position sensor (upper) [A], Fusing shield position sensor (lower)[B]

Fusing Shield Drive Motor

1. Fusing unit (page 340)

357

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Fusing shield drive motor unit [A] ( 2,

1)

3. Fusing shield drive motor [A] ( 2)

358

Paper Exit

Paper Exit
Paper Exit Unit
1. Open the right cover (page 383) 2. Fusing unit (page 340) 3. Inner cover [A] ( 2)

4. Paper exit unit [A] ( 1,

2)

Paper Exit Switching Solenoid

1. Paper exit unit (page 359)

359

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Paper exit switching solenoid [A] ( 2,

1, 1)

Paper Exit Sensor

1. Paper exit unit (page 359) 2. Feeler [A]

360

Paper Exit

3. Harness [A] (

1,

3)

4. Paper exit sensor unit [A] ( 1,

1)

361

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. Paper exit sensor [A]

Reverse Sensor
1. Paper exit unit (page 359) 2. Reverse sensor unit [A] ( 1, 1, 1)

362

Paper Exit

3. Reverse sensor [A]

Reverse Motor
1. Paper exit unit (page 359) 2. Gear [A]

363

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Reverse motor unit [A] ( 3,

1,

1, 1)

4. Reverse motor [A] ( 2,

1)

Fusing Exit Sensor

1. Paper exit unit (page 359)

364

Paper Exit

2. Fusing exit sensor unit [A] ( 1,

1,

1)

3. Fusing exit sensor [A]

365

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Paper Feed
The 1st paper feed unit can be removed without removing the duplex unit (just open the right cover), and you can remove the paper feed unit after pulling out the paper tray. Note that the 1st paper feed unit and 2nd paper feed unit are not interchangeable.

Paper Feed Unit

1st Paper Feed Unit
1. Open the right cover [A] wide ( 2).

2. Pull out the 1st paper tray [A].

366

Paper Feed

3. Paper feed guide plate [A]

4. 1st paper feed unit [A] ( 2,

1)

2nd Paper Feed Unit

1. Duplex unit (page 383)

367

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Pull out the 2nd paper tray [A].

3. Transport guide [A] ( 1)

4. Harness guide [A] ( 1)

368

Paper Feed

5. Paper feed guide plate [A]

6. 2nd paper feed unit [A] ( 2,

1)

Paper Dust Collection Unit

1. Open the right cover (page 383)

369

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Paper dust collection unit [A] ( 1)

Separation Roller, Torque Limiter

1. Pull out the paper tray [A]

370

Paper Feed

2. Open the right cover [A] (page 383)

3. Separation Roller [A], Torque Limiter [B] ( 1)

Pick-up Roller, Paper Feed Roller

1. Pull out the paper tray (page 370) 2. Open the right cover (page 370)

371

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Retainer [A] ( 1)

4. Pick-up Roller [A], Paper Feed Roller [B]

1st Tray Lift Motor / 2nd Tray Lift Motor

1. HVP CB (page 406)

372

Paper Feed

2. 1st Tray Lift Motor [A] ( 2,

1)

3. 2nd Tray Lift Motor [A] ( 2,

1)

Vertical Transport Sensor

1. Paper feed unit (page 366)

373

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Vertical transport sensor unit [A] ( 1,

1)

3. Vertical transport sensor [A]

Limit Sensor
1. Paper feed unit (page 366)

374

Paper Feed

2. Limit sensor [A]

Paper End Sensor

1. Paper feed unit (page 366) 2. While pressing the tab enclosed by the blue circle, remove the paper end sensor [A] (Harness1).

375

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Registration Sensor
1. Open the right cover (page 383) 2. Paper transfer roller unit (page 305) 3. Inner bracket [A] ( 3)

4. Remove the registration sensor from the stay gap using a slotted screwdriver (

1)

376

By-pass Tray Unit

By-pass Tray Unit

By-pass Tray
1. Open the right cover (page 383) 2. Wire [A] ( 1)

3. Open the duplex unit wide. (page 359) 4. Paper transport guide [A] ( 2)

377

4. Replacement and Adjustment

5. By-pass tray [A] (

4,

3, 4)

378

By-pass Tray Unit

By-pass Paper End Sensor

1. Open the by-pass tray [A].

2. By-pass paper end sensor cover [A]

379

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. By-pass paper end sensor unit [A] ( 1,

1)

4. By-pass paper end sensor [A]

By-pass Pick-up Roller

1. Open the by-pass tray. (page 377)

380

By-pass Tray Unit

2. By-pass pick-up roller [A] ( 1)

By-pass Paper Feed Roller

1. Paper End Sensor (page 375) 2. By-pass paper feed roller [A] ( 1)

By-pass Separation Roller

1. Paper transport guide (page 377)

381

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. By-pass separation roller [A] ( 1)

Torque Limiter
1. By-pass separation roller (page 381) 2. Torque limiter [A]

382

Duplex Unit

Duplex Unit
Duplex Unit
1. Unlock the lever [A], and then open the right cover [B].

2. Arm [A] [B] ( 2)

3. Right rear cover (page 232)

383

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Open the 1st paper feed tray [A] and 2nd paper feed tray [B].

5. Cover [A] ( 1)

384

Duplex Unit

6. Duplex unit [A] ( 1,

3)

To attach the duplex unit, loop the harness around as shown in the diagram.

Duplex/By-pass Motor
1. Duplex unit (page 383)

385

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Harness guide [A] ( 4)

3. Duplex/by-pass motor unit [A] ( 3,

1,

3)

4. Duplex/By-pass Motor [A] ( 2)

386

Duplex Unit

Duplex Entrance Sensor

1. Harness guide (page 383) 2. Remove two tabs, and remove the transport guide [A].

3. Duplex entrance unit [A] ( 8)

387

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Duplex entrance sensor unit [A] ( 1)

5. Duplex entrance sensor [A] (

1)

Duplex Exit Sensor

1. Duplex unit (page 383)

388

Duplex Unit

2. Harness guide [A] ( 1)

3. Duplex exit sensor unit [A] ( 1)

389

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Duplex exit sensor [A] (

1)

390

Electrical Components

Electrical Components
There is a FFC with tabs. Release the tabs to remove.

Overview
Printed Circuits/Parts Inside the Controller Box

[A] [B]

BCU IPU

391

4. Replacement and Adjustment

[C] [D] [E]

Controller Box Cooling Fan Controller Board HDD

Printed Circuits Behind the Controller Box.

[A] [B]

HVP_TTS Imaging IOB

Printed Circuit/Parts Inside the Power Box

392

Electrical Components

[A] [B] [C]

PSU (AC controller board) PSU (DC Power) PSU Cooling Fan

Printed Circuits Behind the Power Box.

[A] [B]

HVP_CB Paper Transport IOB

IPU

The FFC connector has a lock mechanism. Do not use force to pull it out.

393

4. Replacement and Adjustment

1. IPU [A] ( 6,

12)

BCU

The FFC connector has a lock mechanism. Do not use force to pull it out. 1. Rear cover (page 230) 2. BCU [A] ( 2, 4)

When installing the new BCU

Remove the NVRAM from the old BCU. Then install it on the new BCU after you replace the BCU. Replace the NVRAM (page 395) if the NVRAM on the old BCU is defective. 394

Electrical Components

Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you replace the NVRAM. Keep NVRAMs (EEPROM) away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data. Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data with SP5-811-004, if not, SC995-001 occurs

Replacing the NVRAM (EEPROM) on the BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. 2. Output the SMC data (ALL) using SP5-990-001/SP5-992-001. 3. Turn off the main switch. 4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot #2, and then turn on the main switch. 5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the BCU. 6. Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cord. 7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU with a new one. 8. Plug in, and then turn on the main switch. When the power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears, but continue with the following steps. 9. Select the destination setting. (SP5-131-001) (JPN: 0, NA: 1, EU/AA/TWN/CHN: 2) 10. Set the following SP, Machine Serial Set (SP5-811-001), Area Selection (SP5-807-001), CPM Set (SP5-882-001). For information on how to configure this SP, contact the supervisor in your branch office. 11. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on. 12. Use SP5-801-002 Memory Clear Engine. After changing the EEPROM, Some SPs do not have appropriate initial values. Because of this, steps 10 to 12 are done. 13. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on. 14. From the SD card where you saved the NV-RAM data in step 5, download the NV-RAM data. 395

4. Replacement and Adjustment

15. Turn off the machine, and then remove the SD card from slot #2. 16. Turn on the main switch. 17. Check the factory setting sheet and the SMC data printout from step 2, and set the user tool and SP settings so they are the same as before. 18. Do ACC (Copier function and Printer function).

Controller Board

Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data. 1. Rear cover (page 230) 2. Controller bracket [A] ( 5)

3. Controller Board [A] ( 4,

2)

396

Electrical Components

4. DIMM (Unlock)

NVRAMs on the controller board

Referring to the following procedure, be sure that there are no mistakes in the mounting position and orientation of the NVRAMs.

SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the NVRAM. If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, each component needs to be replaced because a short circuit was caused in the controller board and the NVRAM. 1. Make sure you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. 2. Output all the SMC data using SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All (Data List)). 3. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the backup by referring to the following procedure. 1. Turn the power OFF. 2. Insert a SD card into slot 2 and turn the power ON. 3. Save the address book data in the SD card using SP5-846-051. The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this procedure. So be sure to obtain a backup of the customers address book data. Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of the address book data.

397

4. Replacement and Adjustment

If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up properly depending on the NVRAM condition. 4. Print the Box List by pressing these buttons in the following order: [Facsimile Features] [General Setting] - [Box Setting: Print List] 5. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order: [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Program Special Sender: Print List] 6. Write down the following fax settings. [Receiver] in [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Reception File Settings] - [Forwarding]. [Notify Destination] in [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Reception File Settings] - [Store]. [Specify User] in [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Stored Reception File User Setting]. [Notify Destination] in [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Folder Transfer Result Report]. Specified folder in [Facsimile Features] - [Send] - [Backup File TX Setting]. [Receiver] in [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Reception File Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer]. [Store: Notify Destination] in [Facsimile Features] - [Reception] - [Output Mode Switch Timer]. All the destination information shown on the display. In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the system internally assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to re-assigning in backup/ restore operations. 7. Make sure that there is no transmission standby file. If any standby file exists, ask the customer to delete it or complete the transmission. 8. Turn the power OFF and unplug the power supply cord. 9. Push the power switch ON again to discharge the residual charge. 10. Replace the NV-RAM with a brand-new one. 11. Turn the power ON. After turning the power ON, SC995 will be displayed except for machines that have a smart operation panel. For machines that have a smart operation panel, SC673 will occur and SC995 might be internally issued after turning the power ON. After turning the power ON, SC870 will occur and the address book data will be cleared. <Additional procedure only for machines that have the Smart Operation Panel installed>

398

Electrical Components

SC673 will be displayed at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because the controller and the smart operation panel cannot communicate with each other due to changing the SP settings for the operation panel. 1. Change the SP settings for the operation panel. SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1. SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value from 0 to 1. 2. Change the Flair API SP values. SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change the value from 0 to 1. SP1-041-001 (Scan:FlairAPI Setting): Change the value from 0 to 1. SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) Change the value from 0 to 1. 3. Cycle the power OFF/ON. 4. Turn the power ON, with the SD card where the NV-RAM data has been uploaded in slot 2. Then download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using SP5-825-001 (NV-RAM Data Download). The download will take a couple of minutes. 5. Turn the power OFF and remove the SD card from slot 2. 6. Turn the power ON. 7. Restore the original settings of the following SPs, referring to the SMC data obtained in step 2. SP5-825-001 does not download the following SP data to the new NV-RAM. So you must set them manually. a. SP5-985-001 (Device Setting: On Board NIC) b. SP5-985-002 (Device Setting: On Board USB) c. SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Settings) d. SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation: Printer) f. SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation: Scanner) g. SP5-730-001 (Extended Function Setting: JavaTM Platform setting) 8. If the security functions (e.g. Stored file encryption/ Auto Erase Memory Setting) were applied, set the functions again.

399

4. Replacement and Adjustment

9. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data using SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to ensure the address book data has been restored properly. If you obtained the backup of the customers address book data in step 3, delete the backup immediately after the NV-RAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking out the customers data. 10. Output all the SMC data with SP5-990-001 and make sure all the SP/UP settings except for counter information are properly restored, by checking the SMC data obtained in step 2. The counters will be reset. 11. Make sure that the list output in steps 4 to 6 matches the destination information in step 6. If not, set it to the setting before replacement. 12. Execute the process control (SP3-011-001). 13. Execute the ACC (Copy). 14. Execute the ACC (Printer). If you cannot execute SP5-824-001 or SP5-825-001 for some reason, try all the following things. Check the changed SP value on the SMC which was output in step 2 and set it manually. Especially, ensure that the values of the following SPs are same as the setting before the replacement. a. SP5-045-001 (Accounting counter: Counter Method) b. SP5-302-002 (Set Time: Time Difference) Because the PM counters have been reset during NV-RAM replacement, it is necessary to replace all the PM parts for proper PM management. If a message tells you need a SD card to restore displays after the NV-RAM replacement, create a SD card for restoration and restore with the SD card. Correspondence table Position [A] [B] Upper Lower Label on the board FRAM2 FRAM1 Label on the NVRAM 2M-2 2M-1

400

Electrical Components

Mounting position and orientation of the NVRAMs

When replacing the controller board, first, check which SDK applications have been installed. After replacing the controller board, re-install the SDK applications by following the installation instructions for each application. After reinstalling the SDK applications, print the SMC (SP-5-990-024/025 (SMC: SDK/ Application Info)). Then open the Main power switch cover. Store the SMC sheet and the SD card(s) that was used to install the SDK application(s).

HDD

Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with SP5846-051 if possible. If the customer is using the Data Overwrite Security, the Data Encryption feature or OCR Scanned PDF, these applications must be installed again. 1. Rear cover (page 230)

401

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. HDD [A] ( 3,

2)

Adjustment after replacement

1. Run SP5832-001, to initialize the hard disk. Even if you use an HDD that is already formatted, it is recommended that you re-initialize. 2. Run SP5853-001, to install the fixed stamps. 3. Run SP5846-052, to copy the address book from the SD card to the HDD. 4. Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.

Imaging IOB
1. Scanner rear cover (page 232) 2. Scanner rear small cover (page 232) 3. Rear right cover (page 231)

402

Electrical Components

4. Open the controller box [A]. ( 6)

5. Imaging IOB [A] ( 5,

14)

HVP_TTS
1. Open the controller box. (page 402)

403

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. HVP_TTS [A] ( 4,

6)

PSU (AC Controller Board)

1. Rear lower cover (page 231) 2. PSU (AC Controller Board) [A] ( 6, 7 for NA, x 6 for EU/AA)

PSU (DC Power)

1. Rear lower cover (page 231)

404

Electrical Components

2. PSU (DC Power) [A] ( 8,

7)

Paper Transport IOB

1. Rear lower cover (page 231) 2. Power supply box [A] ( 6, Among them, tapping screw1, 10, 4)

The power box [A] is hooked onto the machine at the locations in the blue circles.

405

4. Replacement and Adjustment

3. Paper transport IOB [A] ( 6,

22)

HVP-CB

Before replacing the HVP-CB, input all the four charge voltage correction values from the decal on the new board into the correct SPs as shown below, then turn the power OFF. After replacing the board, turn the power ON. SPs for charge voltage correction SP No.

406

Electrical Components

K C M Y

SP2-005-239 SP2-005-240 SP2-005-241 SP2-005-242

A B C

Serial No. Left: Last three digits of SP Number Right: Correction Value QR code (For production process)

The location of the bar-code decal [A]

You need to paste only the following red part on the HVP-CB. QR code and releasing paper can be discarded.

407

4. Replacement and Adjustment

1. Power supply box (page 405) 2. HVP_CB [A] ( 4, 1)

408

Electrical Components

When removing the HVP-CB together with its bracket

1. Release the claws attached to the bracket for HVP-CB [A] ( 4).

2. Remove the HVP-CB together with the bracket [A] ( 2, claw 2,

1).

409

4. Replacement and Adjustment

There are two claws on the bracket [A]. Release them in a downward direction.

410

Fans/Filters

Fans/Filters
Odor Filter
1. Odor filter box [A]

2. Odor filter [A]

Development Intake Fan/Right

1. Inner lower cover (page 239)

411

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Development Intake Fan/Right unit [A] ( 2,

1,

1)

3. Development Intake Fan/Right [A] ( 2)

Development Intake Fan/Left

1. Inner lower cover (page 239) 2. Development Intake Fan/Left unit [A] ( 2, 1)

412

Fans/Filters

3. Development Intake Fan/Left [A] ( 2)

Ozone Exhaust Fan

1. Power supply box (page 405) 2. Ozone exhaust fan [A] ( 2, 1)

Paper Exit Cooling Fan

1. Main power switch cover (page 234)

413

4. Replacement and Adjustment

2. Paper exit cooling fan [A] ( 2,

1)

Fusing Exhaust Heat Fan

1. Rear right cover (page 231) 2. Fusing exhaust heat fan unit [A] ( 2, 1, 1)

414

Fans/Filters

3. Fusing exhaust heat fan [A]

Toner Supply Cooling Fan

1. Rear right cover (page 231) 2. Right rear cover (page 232) 3. Toner supply cooling fan unit [A] ( 2, 1)

415

4. Replacement and Adjustment

4. Toner supply cooling fan [A]

PSU Cooling Fan

1. Rear lower cover (page 231) 2. PSU cooling fan unit [A] ( 2, x1, x1)

3. PSU cooling fan [A]

416

Fans/Filters

Power Box Cooling Fan

1. Rear cover (page 230) 2. Power box cooling fan [A] ( 2)

417

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Image Adjustment
Auto Color Calibration
Image adjustment is performed by setting the Auto Color Calibration (ACC) during installation. When you set the adjustment sheet on the exposure glass, put about 10 pieces of white paper on the adjustment sheet in order for the original to contact the exposure glass sufficiently. Instruct the customer to periodically execute the ACC.

Description [A] [B] [C] [D] is used to output adjustment sheets. You must execute both copy and printer. is used to roll back to the previous value. Displays the last date/time ACC was executed.

Printer Gamma Correction

The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output. You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements.

418

Image Adjustment

Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust the gamma data for the following: Highlight Middle Shadow areas IDmax. The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).

Copy Mode
- KCMY Color Balance Adjustment The adjustment uses only "Offset" values. Never change "Option" values (default value is 0). Highlight (Low ID) Middle (Middle ID) Shadow (High ID) ID max Offset Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Level 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire image density.) The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.

There are four adjustable modes (can be adjusted with SP4-918-009): Copy Photo mode Copy Letter mode Copy Letter (Single Color) mode Copy Photo (Single Color) mode

419

4. Replacement and Adjustment

- Adjustment Procedure 1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust. 2. Enter the SP mode. 3. Select "System SP." 4. Select SP4-918-009. 5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table below). 1. Never change "Option" value (default value is "0"). 2. Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Middle", "Shadow", "Highlight". - Photo Mode, Full Color Item to Adjust ID max: (K, C, M, and Y) Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.

Middle (Middle ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Shadow (High ID) (K, C, M, and Y)

420

Image Adjustment

Highlight (Low ID) (K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is seen as gray (no C, M, or Y should be visible). If the black scale contains C, M, or Y, do steps 1 to 4 again.

K Highlight (Low ID) (C,M, and Y) <on the full color copy>

- Photo Mode, Single Color Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

ID max: (K)

Middle (Middle ID) (K)

Shadow (High ID) (K)

Highlight (Low ID) (K)

- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

421

4. Replacement and Adjustment

ID max: (K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

Middle (Middle ID) (K, C, M, and Y) Shadow (High ID) (K, C, M, and Y)

Highlight (Low ID) (K, C, M, and Y)

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 6 matches that of level 6 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 8 matches that of level 8 on the C-4 chart. Adjust the offset value so that dirty background does not show on the copy and the density of level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-4 chart.

ID max: (K)

Middle (Middle ID) (K)

Shadow (High ID) (K)

Highlight (Low ID) (K)

422

Image Adjustment

Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of "shadow" again until it is.

Printer Mode
There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001): 1200 x 1200 photo mode 1200 x 1200 text mode 2400 x 600 photo mode 2400 x 600 text mode 1800 x 600 photo mode 1800 x 600 text mode 600 x 600 photo mode 600 x 600 text mode K Highlight Shadow Middle IDmax SP1-104-1 SP1-104-2 SP1-104-3 SP1-104-4 C SP1-104-21 SP1-104-22 SP1-104-23 SP1-104-24 M SP1-104-41 SP1-104-42 SP1-104-43 SP1-104-44 Y SP1-104-61 SP1-104-62 SP1-104-63 SP1-104-64

- Adjustment Procedure 1. Do ACC for the printer mode. 2. Turn the main power off and on. 3. Enter SP mode. 4. Select "Printer SP". 5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust. 6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examine the image quality for these settings. 7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart. Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Shadow", "Middle", "Highlight". 8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings. 423

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Color Registration
Adjust color registration with the following procedure when color registration errors occurred.

Check the occurrence of color registration errors

Prepare some A3 sheets. 1. Execute SP2-111-004 (Forced line Position Adj.: Mode d) 2. Make sure that execution completed successfully with using SP2-194-007 (MUSIC). If the value of SP2-194-007 is 0, it indicates that the result of SP2-111-004 was successful. If the value of SP2-194-007 is 1, it indicates that the result of SP2-111-004 was a failure, which you need to fix the color registration errors (See Ways to fix color registration errors page 424). 3. Execute SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern: Pattern Selection) 4. With a loupe, check the details of the color registration errors on the printed test pattern (page 424). Specification: Main/Sub is smaller than 180.0um No color registration errors: Adjustment completed. Color registration errors occurred: Adjust the color registration errors (See Ways to fix color registration errors page 424)

Judgment for type of color registration error

In the following diagrams, solid lines represent K and dotted lines indicate any of C, M or Y. 1. Pattern 1 This is a case in which there is a shift in the sub-scan direction at the leading edge of the paper. The following diagram shows C, M or Y lines closer to the leading edge than K lines.

2. Pattern 2

424

Image Adjustment

This is a case in which there is a shift in the sub-scan direction at the trailing edge of the paper. The following diagram shows C, M or Y lines farther away from the leading edge than K lines.

3. Pattern 3 This is a case in which a color registration error is found in the main-scan direction and size of the error is the same at the left, center and right.

4. Pattern 4 This is a case in which a color registration error is found in the main-scan direction and the size of the error is different at the left, center and right. For M, the largest error will be at the right, followed by the center and then the left. For C or Y, the order will be reversed. This is because the writing direction of the laser beam for K and M is different from C and Y. Case M

425

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Case C or Y

5. Pattern 5 This is a case in which a color registration error is found in the sub-scan direction, but it is not the same as the Pattern 1 or 2. The error appears and disappears at intervals down the page. Ways to fix color registration errors SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position Adj. : Mode D) Execution Result: Failed Case: SP2-194-007: 1 (Failed)

426

Image Adjustment

Result of Check

Blank image, abnormal image, low image density 1. Image Processing failure

Causes SP2-194-010, 011, 012 shows "2" or "3" Solution

2. Pattern density low 3. BCU(IPU) failure 1.Replace PCU, Intermediate Transfer Belt, Power pack 2. Execute process control, supply toner 3. Replace BCU(IPU)

Pattern Result of Check

Normal (but color registration errors occur) 1. ID Sensor shutter failure

Causes Failed to read the pattern of Line position Adj. Solution

2. ID Sensor failure 3. BCU(IPU) failure 1. Replace ID Sensor shutter 2. Replace ID Sensor 3. Replace BCU(IPU)

Pattern

427

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Result of Check Causes Solution Pattern Any of SP2-194-010 or 011 or 012 shows 5 Result of Check

Image density low Pattern density low Execute the process control Supply toner Leading edge registration for M, C, and/or Y shifts over 1.4mm from that of K. 1. Normal

Causes

2. Laser unit failure 3. BCU(IPU) failure 1. Execute SP2-111-003 (Forced Line Position Adj.: Mode c) 2. Replace Laser unit 3. Replace BCU(IPU)

Solution

Pattern

428

Image Adjustment

Result of Check

Leading edge registration of M, C, and/or Y shifts over 1.4mm from that of K. 1. Normal

Causes

2. Image Transfer Belt failure 3. Drive Section failure 4. BCU(IPU)failure 1. Execute SP2-111-003 (Forced Line Position Adj.: Mode c)

Solution

2. Replace Image Transfer Belt 3. Replace PCU/Drum motor 4. Replace BCU(IPU)

Out of line position correction range

Pattern Result of Check

1, 2 The main scan magnification is OK, but the color registration in the center of the image shifts over 0.66mm. 1.ID Sensor(Center) failure

Causes

2. Significant movement of Image Transfer Belt (Center) 3.BCU(IPU) failure 1. Replace ID Sensor

Solution

2. Replace Image Transfer Belt 3. Replace BCU(IPU)

Pattern

429

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Result of Check

Skew of M, C and/or Y shifts over 0.75mm against that of K 1. PCU installation failure

Causes

2. Laser Unit failure 3. BCU(IPU) failure 1. Reset/Replace PCU

Solution Out of line position correction range

2. Replace Laser Unit 3. Replace BCU(IPU)

Pattern Result of Check Causes

Other 1. The upper skew correction value is abnormal 2. BCU(IPU) failure 1. Reset skew correction value (*1) 2. Replace BCU(IPU) -

Solution Pattern
*1 Method for resetting the skew correction value.

1. Turn the power OFF. 2. Remove the harness of the skew correction motor (A second part from the front side) attached to the laser unit. 3. Turn the power ON, and then execute SP2-110-005 to set the skew correction mechanism to the origin. 4. Make sure SP2-119-001 to -003 is set to 0. 5. Turn the power OFF. 6. Connect the harness (A second part from the front side) of the skew correction motor to the laser unit. 7. Turn the power ON SP2-111-001 (Forced Line Position Adj.: Mode A) execution (or Color Registration Error Adjustment via the Maintenance menu) Result: OK Case: SP2-194-007: 0 (Success)

430

Image Adjustment

Result of Check Causes Solution No color registration errors Pattern Result of Check Causes Solution Pattern Result of Check Color registration errors found Causes Solution Pattern Result of Check

Side-to-side registration for K shifted Abnormal SP value of main scan color registration (K) Adjust SP2-101-001 The main-scan magnification for K is not correct. Abnormal SP value of standard sync value between two points (K) Adjust SP2-185-001 Image density low Pattern density low Execute process control, Supply toner The main scan magnification of M, C and/or Y is not correct. 1. Laser Unit failure

Causes Color registration errors found Solution

2. ID Sensor failure 3. BCU(IPU) failure 4. Normal 1. Replace Laser Unit 2. Replace ID Sensor 3. Replace BCU(IPU) 4. Adjust the target SP(s) from among SP2-182-001 to -003

Pattern

431

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Result of Check

Although main scan magnification is OK, the color registration in the center of the image is shifted 1. Significant movement of Image Transfer Belt (Center) 2. ID Sensor (Center) failure 3. BCU(IPU) failure 1. Replace Image Transfer Belt

Causes Color registration errors found Solution

2. Replace ID Sensor 3. Replace BCU(IPU)

Pattern Result of Check

The side-to-side registration of M, C, and/or Y is not correct. 1.ID Sensor(Center) failure

Causes Color registration errors found Solution

2. Significant movement of Image Transfer Belt (Center) 3.BCU(IPU) failure 1. Replace Laser Unit 2. Replace ID Sensor 3. Replace BCU(IPU) 4. Adjust the target SP(s) from among SP2-182-004 to -021

Pattern

432

Image Adjustment

Result of Check

The leading edge registration of M, C and/or Y is not correct. 1. Image Transfer Belt failure 2. Drive Section failure

Causes

3. ID Sensor failure 4. BCU(IPU) failure 5. Normal 1. Replace Image Transfer Belt 2. Replace PCU, Drum motor 3. Replace ID Sensor 4. Replace BCU(IPU) 5. Adjust the target SP(s) from among SP2-182-022 to -039

Color registration errors found

Solution

Pattern Result of Check

1, 2 The skew of M, C and/or Y is not correct. 1. PCU installation failure

Causes Color registration errors found Solution

2. Laser Unit failure 3. IOB failure 1. Reset/Replace PCU 2. Replace Laser Unit 3. Replace IOB

Pattern Result of Check

Shifted Drum phase. 1. PCU installation failure

Causes Color registration errors found Solution

2. Drive Section failure 3. Phase adjustment failure 1. Reset/Replace PCU 2. Check/Replace Drive Section 3. Execute SP1-902-001

Pattern

433

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Adjustment after replacing

Image position adjustment
Parts that require adjustment
The following items need to be adjusted after replacement or executing SP5-801 (Memory Clear). Lens block Scanner motor Polygon motor*1 Laser unit*1 Paper Feed Tray Bypass Tray Duplex unit ADF
*1 Details of Polygon motor or Laser unit: see Laser Unit (page 276)

Laser-related adjustment

Make sure that paper is properly set on each paper feed tray when adjusting (adapt the paper sizes and types to the customers environment). Set the value of SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern) to [14: Trimming Area], to obtain test patterns, except for the main scan magnification adjustment. After adjustment is completed, set the value of SP2-109-003 to [0: None]. <Standard (Margin)> Leading edge: 4.21.5mm (Plain, Thin) Right and Left: 0.5 to 4.0mm Trailing edge: 0.5 to 6.0mm (3.0 to 6.0mm for duplex)

434

Adjustment after replacing

<Registration Adjustment: Side-to-Side (Main scan) / Leading edge (Sub scan)> 1. Output a test pattern and check [A] shown above. The value of SP1-001 (Leading Edge Registration) needs to be adjusted within the standard range if the value of [A] does not reach [5.22mm] for Plain Paper or [4.21.5mm] for thick paper, including Medium Thick. 2. Output a test pattern and check [B] shown above. If the value of [B] does not meet [21mm], the value of SP1-002 (Side-to-Side Registration) needs to be adjusted within the standard range. If the registration adjustment could not be set within the standard, adjust the right and the leading edge erase margins. (See the information below) <Erase margin adjustment> 1. Output a test pattern and check [A] and [B]. If the value of [A] and/or [B] are out of the standard range, adjust them with SP2-103 (Erase Margin Adjustment). Adjust the erase margin for [C] and [D] only when the registration cannot be adjusted within the standard range. After completing the adjustment, perform registration adjustment, then adjust the erase margin for [A] and [B] (see Main scan magnification adjustment below). <Main scan magnification adjustment> 1. Output [7: Grid Pattern Small] with SP2-109-003 (Test Pattern). 2. Check whether the magnification meets the standard. If it is out of the range, change the standard value (Bk) of main scan magnification through SP2-102-001/002/003. You do not need to adjust other three colors (Ma/Cy/Ye) because they will be automatically adjusted in the next steps (Scanner-related adjustment). These SPs enable you to adjust for three line speeds (Standard, Middle, Low speed) for plain/thick paper modes. However, you must input the same value regardless of line speed. 435

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Standard (Magnification tolerance) * Same Size: Main scan: Less than 0.55% * Same Size: Sub scan: Less than 1.00% * Reduction: Main/Sub scan: Less than 1.00/reduction ratio * Enlargement: Main/Sub scan: Less than 1.00% (ex.) current mag. (100.1%) x current SP value (249449) = 1.001 x 249449 = changed SP (249698) Colors will be automatically corrected when performing the line position adjustment.

Scanner-related adjustment

Adjust the laser-related items before performing the scanner-related adjustment. (page 434) Use the C-4 or C-5 test chart for this adjustment. <Scanner registration adjustment: Platen cover> 1. Set the test chart on the exposure glass, select a feed tray and start copying. You can select any feed tray. 2. Check [A] and [B] shown as below to see whether the registration is in the standard range. 3. If the registration is out of the range, execute SP4-010 (Sub Scan Registration Adj.) and SP4-011(Main Scan Reg.) to adjust. A: 4.22mm B: 21mm

SP No. SP4-010-001 SP4-011-001 436

SP Name Sub Scan Registration Adj. Main Scan Reg.

Range 4.22mm 21mm

Adjustment after replacing

<Scanner magnification adjustment> 1. Set the test chart on the exposure glass, select a feed tray and start copying. You can select any feed tray.

2. Check whether the output image was within the standard range compared with the test pattern. If the image is out of range, execute SP4-008(Sub scan Magnification Adj.) to change the magnification. A lower value provides images that are stretched in the feeding direction. On the other hand, a greater value provides a reduced image. Standard (Magnification tolerance) * Same Size: Main scan: Less than 0.55% * Same Size: Sub scan: Less than 1.00% * Reduction: Main/Sub scan: Less than 1.00/reduction ratio * Enlargement: Main/Sub scan: Less than 1.00% <White reference correction> Turn the main power Off and On. The white and black reference will be corrected automatically with this procedure. <Squareness (Skew) adjustment> Do this procedure after adjusting the image area with SP2-109: pattern 14 - trimming area. Method for checking 1. Set the test chart on the exposure glass, select a feed tray and start copying. 2. Count the number of horizontal bars in the two corners of the copy image area. There should be the same number.

437

4. Replacement and Adjustment

Method for adjusting 1. Turn Off the [Power] key and the main power switch, then disconnect the plug. 2. Remove the Operation panel.(page 233, page 240) 3. Remove the Scanner left cover (page 251) 4. Loosen the screws [A] securing the scanner. ( x 7) 5. For images that shifted upward to the right, rotate the adjusting cam [B] clockwise to lower the inside of the scanner. 6. For images that shifted upward to the left, rotate the adjusting cam [B] counterclockwise to raise the inside of the scanner.

438

Adjustment after replacing

The adjusting amount of the cam is 0.5 mm steps. 7. Tighten the screws [A] that were loosened in step 4. 8. Put the operation panel and covers back into their original places. (After adjustment, be sure to check that output images are normal).

ADF image adjustment

<Registration adjustment> 1. Create a test chart shown below with A3 paper.

2. Set the test chart in the ADF. Select a feed tray that has A3 paper, and start copying. 3. Check [A] and [B]. If they are out of the standard range, adjust it with SP6-006 (ADF Adjustment) 439

4. Replacement and Adjustment

A: 4.22mm B: 21mm SP No. SP6-006-001 SP6-006-003 SP6-006-005 SP6-006-006 SP6-006-007 SP Name Side-to-Side Regist: Front Side-to-Side Regist: Rear Leading Edge Registration Buckle: Duplex Rear Rear Edge Erase Range 3.0mm 5.0mm 3.0mm 2.5mm 10.0mm

<Sub scan magnification adjustment> 1. Set the same test chart as the one used in the Registration adjustment in the ADF. Select a feed tray that has A3 paper, and start copying. 2. Check whether the Sub scan magnification is within the standard range. If not, adjust it with SP6-017-001(ADF Magnification Adj.). Standard (Magnification tolerance) * Same Size: Sub scan: 5.0% * Reduction: Sub scan: 1.00% * Enlargement: Sub scan: 1.00%

440

5. Troubleshooting
Self-Diagnostic Mode
Service Call Codes
Service Call Conditions
Pattern Display How to reset Execute CE reset SP mode, and switch main power from OFF to ON. When canceling a fusing unit SC, (SC544-00/ SC554-00/ SC564-00/ SC574-00), perform part replacement in accordance with the above procedure. SC call or SC alarm in customer support system

The SC is displayed on the operation panel, and the machine cannot be used (safety-related SC).

Occurrence & alarm count Immediate alarm

When a function is selected, the SC is Switch the user reset power displayed on the operation key or main power switch panel, and the machine OFF to ON. cannot be used (downtime mitigation).

Occurrence & alarm count Power OFF ON

Alarm count and alarm only if recurrence Occurrence

No display on the operation panel, and use is permitted.

Count only logging.

Logging count & alarm count

441

5. Troubleshooting

Pattern

Display

How to reset

SC call or SC alarm in customer support system Occurrence & alarm count

The SC is displayed on the operation panel, and the machine cannot be used (machine-error SC).

Switch user reset power key or main power switch OFF to ON.

Power supply OFF

ON

Alarm count and alarm only if recurrence

When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When an event is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary SC, reboot is not performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is displayed after the reboot. When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without rebooting, and logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an * mark is added alongside the SC number for clarity. Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting) (default value: ON).

SC logging
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code" are logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is not performed. Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history is logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively deleted starting from the oldest.

SC automatic reboot
When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting out) (default value: 0 "Automatic reboot"). When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it can reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to the @Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good solution if an SC occurs twice.

442

Self-Diagnostic Mode

When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only when the main power switch is switched OFF to ON). Screen display during reboot Status display on the current screen Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc. Automatic reboot .... After operation end Post-processing

Until automatic reboot

Reset key (Reboot key) Key to perform reboot # Cancel key is not displayed. Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated). Operation during SC reboot Timing of SC reboot When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total counter counts 10 times.

Time to automatic reboot Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of postprocessing during printing, etc. At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not start process control when a reboot is possible. Automatic reboot See the flowchart below.

443

5. Troubleshooting

444

Self-Diagnostic Mode

Controller self-diagnosis outline

Controller self-diagnosis includes 3 types, i.e., "ordinary self-diagnosis", "detailed self-diagnosis", and "SC detection". "Ordinary self-diagnosis" is diagnosis performed for every power ON, and "detailed self-diagnosis" is diagnosis treated as part of the service tools. "SC detection" detects mechanical faults when power is switched on or when the machine is operating. Detailed self-diagnosis Method 1. After attaching the option "extension 1284 board" to the controller board, connect the conversion connector provided. 2. Set a loop back connector in the reference Centronics I/F. 3. Press the main power supply switch while simultaneously pressing the "#" and "./* key. The display changes to the following screen, and self-diagnosis starts.

4. After the end of detailed self-diagnosis, a "Self-diagnosis results report" is automatically printed. If a Centronics loopback connector is not fitted, a Centronics diagnosis error (SC 835) is generated. Loop-back connector: G0219350

445

5. Troubleshooting

Controller self-diagnosis flowchart

446

Self-Diagnostic Mode

447

5. Troubleshooting

448

Self-Diagnostic Mode

449

5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 101-195

SC100 (Engine: Scanning)
SC No. SC101-01 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Lamp Error (Scanning) The white level peak did not reach the prescribed threshold when the white guide plate was scanned. LED defective IDB (LED driver) defective SBU defective IPU defective Power/signal harness defective Condensation in scanner unit Mirrors or lenses dirty or positioned incorrectly White guide plate dirty or installed incorrectly 1. Turn the power off/on. 2. Perform the following operations: Reconnect the power/signal harness. Reattach/clean the mirrors/lenses. Reattach/clean the white plate. Clean the white guide plate. 3. Replace the following parts: Replace the LED board. Replace the IDB board or SIO board. Replace the SBU board. Replace the IPU board. Replace the power/signal harness.

450

Service Call 101-195

SC No. -02

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Lamp Error (LED illumination adjustment) LED error was detected. LED defective IDB (LED driver) defective Power/signal harness defective 1. Turn the power off/on. 2. Perform the following operations: Reconnect the power/signal harness. 3. Replace the following parts: Replace the LED board. Replace the IDB board or SIO board. Replace the power/signal harness.

SC No. SC102-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution LED Illumination Adjustment Error The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the white plate was scanned after a specified number of adjustments. LED defective IDB (LED driver) defective SBU defective IPU defective Power/signal harness defective 1. Turn the power off/on. 2. Reconnect the power/signal harness. 3. Replace the following parts: Replace the LED board. Replace the SBU board. Replace the IDB board or SIO board. Replace the IPU board. Replace the power/signal harness. 451

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC120-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Scanner Home Position Error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not go OFF. Details: Error detection timing During homing (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from energy save mode) During an automatic adjustment (when the machine is turned ON or when it returns from energy save mode) During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass. Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Scanner HP sensor defective Harness defective Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly Replace the following parts: Replace the HP sensor Replace the scanner motor Replace the harness.

452

Service Call 101-195

SC No. SC121-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Scanner Home Position Error 2 The scanner home position sensor does not go ON. Details: Error detection timing During homing During an automatic adjustment During a scan from the ADF or exposure glass. Scanner motor driver defective Scanner motor defective Scanner HP sensor defective Harness defective Timing belt, pulley, wire, or carriage not installed correctly Replace the following parts: Replace the home position sensor Replace the scanner motor Replace the harness.

SC No. SC141-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Black level detection error The black level cannot be adjusted within the target during auto gain control. SBU defective IPU defective Power/signal harness defective 1. Turn the power off/on. 2. Reconnect the power/signal harness. 3. Replace the following parts: Replace the SBU board. Replace the IPU board. Replace the power/signal harness. 453

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC142-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution White level detection error The white level cannot be adjusted to the second target level within the target during auto gain control. SBU defective LED defective IDB (LED driver) defective IPU defective Power/signal harness defective Scanner drive error Condensation in scanner unit Mirrors or lenses dirty or positioned incorrectly White plate dirty or installed incorrectly 1. Turn the power off/on. 2. Perform the following operations: Reconnect the power/signal harness. Reattach/clean the mirrors/lenses. Reattach/clean the white plate. 3. Replace the following parts: Replace the SBU board. Replace the LED board. Replace the IDB board. Replace the IPU board. Replace the SIO board. Replace the power/signal harness.

454

Service Call 101-195

SC No. SC144-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SBU Communication Error Connection to SBU cannot be confirmed. (Connection detection error) Cannot communicate with the SBU, or the communication result is abnormal. SBU defective The other side of the communication (BCU, IPU etc.) defective Power/signal harness defective 1. Turn the power off/on. 2. Reconnect the power/signal harness. 3. Replace the following parts: Replace the SBU board. Replace the IPU board. Replace the BCU board. Replace the power/signal harness.

SC No. SC161-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution IPU Error (LSYNC abnormal) An error occurred during the self-diagnostic test performed every time the machine is turned on, or returns to full operation from energy save mode. IPU board defective (ASIC connection failure, ASIC abnormal, etc.) Cable between SBU and IPU defective Replace the IPU board. Check the cable between SBU and IPU

455

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC161-02

Level D IPU error

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

The machine detects an error during an access to the IPU. IPU board defective (IPU response abnormal, etc.) Replace the IPU board. SC No. SC165-00 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Copy data security unit error The copy data security option is enabled in the User Tools but the option board is detected as missing or defective. The copy data security option was detected as defective when the machine was turned on or returned from energy save mode. Copy data security unit board not installed correctly Copy data security unit board defective Reinstall the copy data security unit board. Replace the copy data security unit board. SC No. SC195-00 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Machine serial number error Comparison of the product identification code in the machine serial number (11 digits). The product identification code in the machine serial number (11 digits) does not match. Re-enter the machine serial number.

456

Service Call 201-285

Service Call 201-285

SC200 (Engine: Image Writing)
SC No. SC201-00 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Polygon Motor Error XSCRDY signal (Polygon ready) Error I/F harness for Polygon Motor Driver is broken/contact failure Polygon Motor/Polygon Motor Driver failure Driving pulse from Polygon Motor output abnormally (Polygon controller area) Unable to monitor XSCRDY signal (Polygon controller area) Cycle the main power On/Off Replace the polygon motor Replace the laser unit Replace the I/F harness Replace the IPU

457

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC202-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Polygon Motor: ON Timeout Error After the polygon motor turned on, or within T1 sec. after the rpms changed, the motor did not enter READY status. The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not connected correctly. Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon controller) XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller) Turn the power off/on Replace the LSU or polygon motor Replace the polygon harness Replace the IPU board

SC No. SC203-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Polygon Motor: OFF Timeout Error The XSCRDY signal (polygon ready) never becomes inactive (H) within 3 sec. after the polygon motor went OFF. The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not connected correctly. Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective Polygon motor drive pulse cannot be output correctly. (Polygon controller) XSCRDY signal observation failing (Polygon controller) Turn the power off/on Replace the LSU or polygon motor Replace the polygon harness Replace the IPU board

458

Service Call 201-285

SC No. SC204-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Polygon Motor: XSCRDY Signal Error During polygon motor rotation, the XSCRDY signal was inactive (H) for longer than one rotation of the polygon. The interface harness to the polygon motor driver damaged or not connected correctly. Polygon motor or polygon motor driver defective Turn the power off/on Replace the LSU or polygon motor Replace the polygon harness Replace the IPU board

SC No. SC220-01 SC220-04

Level D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Leading Edge: LD1 synchronization detection error: Bk Leading Edge: LD1 synchronization detection error: Ye The leading edge LD0 synchronization detection signal of the corresponding color was not output within T1 sec. while the polygon mirror motor was operating at normal speed. The interface harness to the synchronization detection unit damaged or not connected correctly. Synchronization detection board defective Beam does not enter photo detector. Abnormality around GAVD IDB (LED driver) defective LDB defective BCU defective Turn the power off/on Replace the LSU or polygon motor Replace the polygon harness Replace the IPU board

459

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC230-01 SC230-02 SC230-03 SC230-04

Level D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution FGATE ON error: Bk FGATE ON error: Cy FGATE ON error: Ma FGATE ON error: Ye The FGATE signal did not turn ON within T1 sec. after the writing process of the corresponding color started. GAVD defective Image processing ASIC defective BCU, controller board not connected correctly or defective Harness between IPU and LDB defective Turn the power off/on Replace the IPU board Replace the controller board

SC No. SC231-01 SC231-02 SC231-03 SC231-04

Level D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution FGATE OFF error: Bk FGATE OFF error: Cy FGATE OFF error: Ma FGATE OFF error: Ye The FGATE signal did not turn OFF within T1 sec. after the writing process of the corresponding color ended. The FGATE signal did not turn OFF when the next job of the corresponding color started. GAVD defective Image processing ASIC defective Turn the power off/on. Replace the IPU board. Replace the controller board.

460

Service Call 201-285

SC No. SC240-01 SC240-04

Level D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution LD error: Bk LD error: Ma If LD error terminal of LD driver of corresponding color is asserted after LD initialization. If an error is detected during initialization of P-MAC which detects Ith/Ieta of LD of corresponding color. LD degradation (LD broken, shift of output characteristics etc.) The interface harness damaged or not connected correctly. LD driver defective Cycle the main power off/on Replace the LD unit Replace the harness Replace the IPU board

SC No. SC272-01 SC272-02 SC272-03 SC272-04 SC272-10

Level D D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution LD driver communication error: Bk LD driver communication error: Cy LD driver communication error: Ma LD driver communication error: Ye LD driver communication error: Other In view of parity, 3 retries were performed IPU defective Harness defective LDB defective Cycle the main power off/on Replace the LD unit Replace the harness Replace the IPU board

461

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC285-00

Level C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution MUSIC error The results of MUSIC pattern reading failed 4 times. (even if mode e (real time MUSIC) fails, the error count is not incremented (+1)) TM sensor defective ITB defective PCU defective LD unit defective MUSIC pattern density thin ITB reset PCU reset Toner replenishment Replace the TM (ID) sensor Replace the ITB Replace the PCU Replace the LD unit

462

Service Call 324-396

Service Call 324-396

SC300 (Engine: Charge, Development)
SC No. SC324-01 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Development motor: Bk: Lock Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level is detected at least 20 times Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Development unit torque increased Replace the motor Reconnect the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB Replace the development unit Replace the drive unit

463

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC324-05

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Development motor: CMY: Lock Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level is detected at least 20 times Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Development unit torque increased Replace the motor Reconnect the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB Replace the development unit

SC No. SC360-01 SC360-02 SC360-03 SC360-04

Level D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TD sensor adjustment error (K) TD sensor adjustment error (C) TD sensor adjustment error (M) TD sensor adjustment error (Y) During TD sensor initialization, the TD sensor output voltage (Vt) cannot be adjusted to the target range (target value 0.2V, SP3-030-031 to 034) for 3 times consecutively. TD sensor defective Loose connection Harness broken Developer toner density differs from initial developer Replace the development unit.

464

Service Call 324-396

SC No. SC361-01 SC361-02 SC361-03 SC361-04

Level D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (K) TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (C) TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (M) TD sensor output error: Upper Limit (Y) TD sensor output: Vt (SP3-210-001 to 004) > output upper limit error threshold (SP3-211-002) continuously exceeded the upper limit occurrence threshold value (SP3-211-003). TD sensor connector dropout (connection fault) 1. TD sensor connector missing check 2. Check whether there is any error in the TD sensor harness (disconnection, etc.) 3. If the sensor is defective, replace the development unit.

SC No. SC362-01 SC362-02 SC362-03 SC362-04

Level D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TD sensor output error: Lower limit (K) TD sensor output error: Lower limit (C) TD sensor output error: Lower limit (M) TD sensor output error: Lower limit (Y) TD sensor output: Vt (SP3-210-001 - 004) < output lower limit error threshold (SP3-211-004) is continuously below the lower limit occurrence threshold value (SP3-211-005) TD sensor connector missing/dropout 1. TD sensor connector missing check 2. Check whether there is any error in the TD sensor harness (disconnection, etc.) 3. If the sensor is defective, replace the development unit.

SC No. SC370-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TM (ID) sensor calibration error (F)

465

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC370-02 SC370-03

Level D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TM (ID) sensor calibration error (C) TM (ID) sensor calibration error (R) Regular reflection optical output voltage of the Front or Center or Rear TM (ID) sensor: Vsg_reg cannot be adjusted to within target range. Upper limit (SP3-320-013: initial value 4.5V) Lower limit (SP3-320-014: initial value 3.5V) TM (ID) sensor connector missing/ connection fault TM (ID) sensor detection window dirt TM (ID) sensor malfunction Undulation in the ITB, or belt slippage Remove image transfer unit, and check for TM (ID) sensor connector missing. If it is missing, reconnect it. Check for dirt on the ID sensor detection window. If te detection window is dirty, clean by predetermined method (do not wipe dry). Check the condition of the ITB. If undulation or belt slippage has occurred, re-install or replace the ITB. If neither of the above have occurred, perform TM (ID) sensor replacement

466

Service Call 324-396

SC No. SC396-05

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Drum motor (CMY) Lock Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level is detected at least 20 times. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Unit torque increased. Replace the motor Reconnect the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB Replace the PCDU

467

5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 441-498

SC400 (Engine: Around the Drum)
SC No. SC441-00 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Drum transfer motor: Lock Lock signals are observed at 2 sec intervals during motor ON, and a High level is detected at least 20 times. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Unit torque increased. Replace the motor Reconnect the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB Check the load on the motor (PCDU, Image transfer unit, Paper transfer unit, Waste toner bottle). Replace the PCDU, Image transfer unit, Paper transfer unit or Waste toner bottle.

468

Service Call 441-498

SC No. SC442-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution ITB Lift Error Even though the ITB lift motor (also Toner supply motor (M)) rotates, the ITB lift sensor failed to detect the specified sensor feeler status within specified time. Contact/separation operation: If not detected in 2000msec Home position operation: If not detected in 5000msec Signal detection sampling period: 10msec Image transfer unit not set/faulty setting Sensor dirt Sensor defective Motor defective Unit load large Reset the Image transfer unit Clean the sensor Replace the sensor Replace the contact/separation drive unit Replace the image transfer unit Check the harness

469

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC452-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Paper transfer contact motor error Paper transfer contact motor: position sensor cannot detect the sensor filler state within the predetermined time (see below) even if the paper transfer contact motor is rotated. Contact operation: If not detected in 2000msec Home position operation: If not detected in 5000msec Signal detection sampling period: 10msec Sensor dirt Sensor defection Motor defection Unit load large Replace the contact drive unit Replace the image transfer unit Check the harness

470

Service Call 441-498

SC No. SC491-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution High voltage power source: charge/development: output error SC detection signal (charge/development) is L (abnormal) for 200 ms consecutively during high voltage (charge/development) output. H/W error Output contact setting fault Controller connector set fault Ground fault of output high voltage path Surface/air clearance insufficient (arc discharge) Controller harness disconnection, short-circuit PCU setting fault Control board _IOB error (related signal error) HVP_CB error Load error Grounding fault of charging output, short-circuit with other outputs Surface/air clearance insufficient in charging output path (including distance from other outputs) Abnormal deterioration of drum, and over current due to pinholes Drum vs charge roller gap error (PCU error). Over current due to drum surface condensation Grounding fault of developing output, short-circuit with other outputs Surface/air clearance insufficient in developing output path (including distance from other outputs) Other Cycle the main power off/on Reset or replace the harness of high voltage power supply feed path Reset or replace the harness between IOB-HVP_CB Reset or replace the PCU Check the operation of the contact mechanism Replace the HVP_CB Replace the IOB

471

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC492-00

Level C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution High voltage power source: image transfer/paper transfer: output error SC detection signal (transfer) is L (abnormal) for 200 ms consecutively during high voltage (transfer) output. H/W error Output power connector setting fault Controller connector setting fault Output high voltage Harness disconnection Controller harness disconnection, short-circuit Transfer unit setting fault Control board_ IOB error (related signal error) HVP_TTS error Load error Increase in paper transfer roller impedance (low temperature environment/impedance rise/impedance rise due to dirt) Operation fault of paper transfer contact mechanism Increase in image transfer belt impedance Opening in load power supply path Reset or replacement the harness of high voltage power supply feed path Reset or replace the harness between IOB-HVP_TTS Reset or replace the transfer unit Check operation of the contact mechanism Replace the HVP_TTS Replace the IOB

472

Service Call 441-498

SC No. SC493-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution High voltage power source: DS development: output error "HVP:DS:output error detection signal" is detected 0 (abnormal) for 10 times consecutively (for 200ms) during output of the PWM signal used as an error detection target Leak harness fault Unit fault High voltage power source fault Turn the power off/on Reset or replacement the harness of high voltage power supply feed path Reset or replace the unit Replace the high voltage power source

SC No. SC497-00

Level C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Machine temperature detection thermistor error Temperature sensor output error: Below 0.56V (90 degrees or more), or above 3.0V (below -18 degrees) Connector disconnection or broken Sensor defective Check the sensor setting Replace the imaging temperature sensor (thermistor)

SC No. SC498-00

Level C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Temperature and humidity sensor error Temperature sensor output error: Below 0.76V, or above 2.90V, or Moisture sensor output error: more than 2.4V Sensor not setting (disconnection or broken) Sensor defective Check the sensor setting Replace the sensor 473

5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 501-584

SC500 (Engine: Paper transport 1: Paper Feed, Duplex, Transport)
SC No. SC501-01 Level B Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 1st Tray Lift Error The 1st tray lift motor error detection count reaches 3. (Up to 2, reset is displayed) 1st tray limit sensor connector missing, malfunction, dirt 1st tray lift motor connector missing, disconnection, malfunction. Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor. Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter 1st tray limit sensor, 1st tray lift motor Check the harness Reset the connector Replacement 1st paper feed unit, 1st tray Replacement Paper transport IOB Replacement

474

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC501-02

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 1st Tray Lowering Error The 1st tray descent motor error detection count reaches 5. (Up to 4, reset is displayed) 1st tray limit sensor connector missing, malfunction, dirt 1st tray lift motor connector missing, disconnection, malfunction Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor. Paper set fault Paper overload Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter 1st tray limit sensor, 1st tray lift motor Check the harness Reset the connector Replacement 1st paper feed unit, 1st tray Replacement Paper transport IOB Replacement

475

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC502-01

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 2nd Tray Lift Error The 2nd tray lift motor error detection count reaches 3. (Up to 2, reset is displayed) 2nd tray limit sensor connector missing, malfunction, dirt 2nd tray lift motor connector missing, disconnection, malfunction Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter 2nd tray limit sensor, 2nd tray lift motor Check the harness Reset the connector Replacement 2nd paper feed unit, 2nd tray Replacement Paper transport IOB Replacement

476

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC502-02

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 2nd Tray Lowering Error The detection count of 2nd tray descent motor descent errors reaches a total of 5. (Up to 4, reset is displayed) The 2nd paper feed tray limit sensor connector missing, malfunction, and dirt 2nd tray lift motor connector missing, disconnection, malfunction Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Paper overload Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter 2nd tray limit sensor, 2nd tray lift motor Check the harness Reset the connector Replacement 2nd paper feed unit, 2nd tray Replacement Paper transport IOB Replacement

477

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC503-01

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Lift Error (single bank) Lift motor ascent error detection During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, and the limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, the bank transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine) Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm

478

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Lowering Error (single bank) Lift motor descent error detection During tray initialization, the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, and the limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, the bank transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine) Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper overload

SC503-02

Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm

479

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Lift Error (double bank, upper tray) Lift motor ascent error detection During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, and the limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, the bank transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine) Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm

SC503-11

480

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Lowering Error (double bank, upper tray) Lift motor descent error detection During tray initialization, the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position; the limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, the bank transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine) Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper overload

SC503-12

Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm

481

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Lift Error (LCIT) Upper limit detection error (during descent) During tray initialization (upper limit detection/lower limit not detected), the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, and the limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively.

SC503-31

Upper limit detection error (during ascent) During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, and the limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, LCIT transmits "tray set fault" to the main machine)

482

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the right tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Timing belt damage/dropout Timing pulley damage/dropout Base plate damage/horizontality fault Paper feed roller missing item Pickup arm damage Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm Replace the timing belt Replace the timing pulley Replace the base plate

483

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Lowering Error (LCIT) Lower limit detection error (during descent) During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower eject limit detection), the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, and the lower limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed.

SC503-32

Alternatively, at paper end, the tray base plate is lowered, but the lower limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed. Lower limit error (during ascent) During tray initialization (upper limit eject detection/lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, and the lower limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed. *If an error occurs 3 times consecutively: LCIT transmits "3rd tray lower limit detection error" to the main machine. Up to 2 times consecutively, LCIT transmits "tray set fault" to the main machine.

484

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Lift motor error/connector missing Lower limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the right tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Timing belt damage/dropout Timing pulley damage/dropout Base plate damage/horizontality fault Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the timing belt Replace the timing pulley Replace the base plate

485

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Paper Overload Error (LCIT) During tray initialization, both the upper limit and lower limit are detected 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, LCIT transmits "tray set fault" to the main machine) Paper overload Paper set fault Limit sensor error/connector missing Lower limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the right tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray

SC503-33

486

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Paper Position Error (LCIT) During left/right tray set, or when power is switched ON, or when transfer is complete, "open" is detected 3 times consecutively by end fence open/close detection. (Up to 2 times consecutively, LCIT transmits "tray set fault" to the main machine) Paper set fault (paper is offset from position for pushing end fence) Foreign matter entry (foreign matter is caught in the position for pushing end fence)

SC503-34

End fence open/close sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray

487

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Transfer Error (LCIT) Transfer end detection error At right tray paper end (right tray lower limit detection, left tray paper detection), left tray paper is transferred to the right tray, but the left tray paper sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed (transfer paper missing is not detected), for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, LCIT transmits "tray set fault" to the main machine) Transfer motor error/connector missing

SC503-35

Left tray paper sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper overload Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the left tray and the tray transfer motor Paper set fault Timing belt damage/dropout Timing pulley damage/dropout Transfer fence defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the left tray Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the tray Replace the timing belt Replace the timing pulley Replace the end fence of the left tray

488

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 3rd Tray Transfer HP Error (LCIT) HP detection error (during transfer start) At right tray paper end (right tray lower limit detection, left tray paper detection), left tray paper is transferred to the right tray, but the left tray transfer fence HP sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed (HP sensor missing cannot be detected)

SC503-36

HP detection error (during transfer fence HP return) During left tray transfer fence HP not detected (stop after paper transfer, during power supply ON, during left tray set), the left tray transfer fence is moved to HP, but the left tray HP sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed. *If an error occurs 3 times consecutively: LCIT transmits "3rd paper feed tray transfer HP error" to the main machine. (Up to 2 times consecutively, LCIT transmits "tray set fault" to the main machine)

489

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Transfer motor error/connector missing Left tray transfer fence HP sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper overload Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the left tray and the tray transport motor Paper set fault Timing belt damage/dropout Timing pulley damage/dropout Transfer fence defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the left tray Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the tray Replace the timing belt Replace the timing pulley Replace the end fence of the left tray

490

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC504-21

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 4th Tray Lift Error (double bank, lower tray) Lift motor ascent error detection During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but the limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, the bank transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine) Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm

491

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 4th Tray Lowering Error (double bank, lower tray) Lift motor descent error detection During tray initialization, the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, but the limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed, for 3 times consecutively. (Up to 2 times consecutively, the bank transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine)

SC504-22

Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper overload Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught between the paper feed tray and the tray lift motor Paper set fault Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional paper feed tray Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm

492

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC505-41

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Side LCIT Limit Detection Error Upper limit detection error (during descent) During tray initialization (upper limit detection/lower limit not detected), the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, but the limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed. Upper limit detection error (during ascent) During tray initialization (upper limit not detected /lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but the limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed. *If an error occurs for 3 times consecutively: the side LCIT transmits a "5th paper feed tray upper limit detection error" to the main machine. Up to 2 times consecutively, the side LCIT transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine.

493

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Lift motor error/connector missing Limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper set fault Timing belt damage/dropout Timing pulley damage/dropout Base plate damage/horizontality fault Paper feed roller missing item Pickup arm defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional side LCT Replace the tray Replace the paper feed roller Replace the pick-up arm Replace the timing belt Replace the timing pulley Replace the base plate

494

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Side LCIT Lower Limit Detection Error Lower limit detection error (during descent) During tray initialization (upper limit not detected /lower limit eject detection), the tray base plate is lowered to check the tray base plate position, but the lower limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed.

SC505-42

Alternatively, at paper end, the tray base plate is lowered, but the lower limit sensor is not detected although a predetermined time elapsed. Lower limit detection error (during ascent) During tray initialization (upper limit not detected/lower limit detection), the tray base plate is raised to check the tray base plate position, but the lower limit sensor is detected although a predetermined time elapsed. *If an error occurs for 3 times consecutively: the side LCIT transmits a "5th paper feed tray upper limit detection error" to the main machine. Up to 2 times consecutively, the side LCIT transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine.

495

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Lift motor error/connector missing Lower limit sensor error/connector missing Harness broken Bank control board defective Paper set fault Timing belt damage/dropout Timing pulley damage/dropout Base plate damage/horizontality fault Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional side LCT Replace the tray Replace the timing belt Replace the timing pulley Replace the base plate

496

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Side LCIT Paper Overload Error During tray initialization, both the upper limit and lower limit are detected for 3 times consecutively (up to 2 times consecutively, the side LCIT transmits a "tray set fault" to the main machine. Paper overload Paper set fault Limit sensor error/connector missing Lower limit sensor error/connector missing

SC505-43

Harness broken Bank control board defective Foreign matter, such as paper scrap, is caught inside the tray Reset the paper Remove the foreign matter Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the sensor Replace the control board for the optional side LCT

SC No. SC520-01 SC520-02 SC520-03

Level C C C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Registration Motor: Lock Paper feed Motor: Lock Transport Motor: Lock

497

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo and err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at least 5 times. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Encoder defective Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

SC No. SC521-01 SC521-02

Level C C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Duplex Entrance Motor: Lock Duplex By-pass Motor: Lock During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo and err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at least 5 times. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Encoder defective Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

498

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC522-00

Level C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Paper Exit Motor: Lock During motor ON, after checking the motor error notification registers (err_velo and err_posi) for 500msec, the error state of either register was detected at least 5 times. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Encoder defective Replace the motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

SC No. SC530-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Exhaust Heat Fan Lock In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec. If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Replace the fusing exhaust heat fan Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

SC No. SC531-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Development Intake Fan/Right Lock

499

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC531-02 SC531-03

Level D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Development Intake Fan/Left Lock Drive Cooling Fan Lock In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec. If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Replace the development intake fan/right for SC531-01, development intake fan/left for SC531-02 or drive cooling fan for SC531-03 Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

SC No. SC533-01 SC533-03 SC533-04

Level D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution PSU Exhaust Heat Fan Lock PSU Cooling Fan Lock Controller Box Cooling Fan Lock

500

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec. If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Replace the PSU exhaust fan for SC533-01, PSU cooling fan for SC533-04 or controller box cooling fan for SC533-04 Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

SC No. SC534-01 SC534-02 SC534-03

Level D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Main Exhaust Fan Lock Toner Supply Cooling Fan Lock Ozone Exhaust Fan Lock In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec. If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Replace the development intake fan/right for SC531-01, development intake fan/left for SC531-02 or drive cooling fan for SC531-03 Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

501

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC535-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Paper Exit Cooling Fan Lock In the motor ON state, the value of the lock sensor is checked every 100msec. If a lock signal is not obtained for 50 times consecutively. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Replace the paper exit cooling fan Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

SC No. SC540-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Motor: Lock During motor ON, after checking lock signals for 2sec, a High level was detected at least 20 times. Motor defective Connector disconnected Harness broken IOB defective Unit torque increased Replace the fusing motor Reset the connector Replace the harness Replace the IOB

502

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC541-01

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Central Thermopile Disconnection Below -50 degrees C (or below CB) is detected for (t11) seconds continuously. disconnection Connector disconnected Replace the thermopile Reset the connector Replace the connector Central NC Sensor Disconnection 3ED - 3FF (FB voltage: 3.243V-3.300V) is detected for (t13) seconds continuously (NC sensor center: detection & compensation NC sensor edge: detection & compensation). Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.

SC541-02

NC sensor disconnection Connector disconnected Reset the NC sensor Reset the connector Replace the connector Central NC sensor short-circuit AD value: 0-13 (FB voltage: 0.000V-0.041V) (*3) is detected for (t14) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.

SC541-03

NC short-circuit Connector disconnected Reset the NC sensor Reset the connector Replace the connector

503

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC542-02

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing central thermopile does not reload (T21) degrees C not reached after heater 1 ON for (t3) seconds

SC542-03

Fusing central thermopile does not reload Heating central reload permission temperature not reached after heater 1 ON for (t311) seconds. Thermopile lens dirt Thermopile modification/float Outside input voltage guarantee After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operation Replace the thermopile Check that the input voltage is within acceptable limits

SC No. SC543-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing central thermopile high temperature detection (software) Above (T3) degrees C detected for (t4) seconds continuously. Detection period 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Triac short-circuit IOB board defective BCU board defective Replace the IOB board Replace the BCU board Replace the fusing unit

504

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC544-01

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing central thermopile high temperature detection (hardware) In the event of an error Triac defective (short-circuit) Engine controller defective Heating central thermopile defective Fusing control software: out of control If the triac is defective, replace the AC power supply board If necessary, replace the BCU or the heating central thermopile

SC No. SC544-02

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing central NC sensor high temperature detection (hardware) In the event of an error Triac defective (short-circuit) Engine controller defective Heating central thermopile defective Fusing control software: out of control Attach the new fusing unit, then run SP-5-810-002 If the triac is defective, replace the AC power supply board If necessary, replace the BCU or the Fusing central NC sensor

505

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC545-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing central heater continuously Heat After waiting for full power for more than (t6) seconds continuously, not detected for (t8) seconds. Definition of heater full power Continuously heating rate set point (maximum heating rate) Measurement start point After reload (after heater extinguished, after rotation complete) below the standby temperature (target temperature), measurement starts after a heater heat-up request is issued. Measurement stop condition Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other. Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded. Thermistor deformation/float Heater disconnection After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operates Replace the thermistor Replace the fusing lamp Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC547-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Zero cross error (relay-contact soldering) In the event of an error Fusing relay defective (contact soldering) Fusing relay drive circuit fault Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the PSU (AC Controller Board) Check the connection between PSU (AC Controller Board) and control board, and replace harness and board if necessary

506

Service Call 501-584

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Zero cross error (relay contact fault) In the event of an error Fusing relay damage (contact open) Fusing relay drive circuit fault PSU fuse (24VS) blowout

SC547-02

Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON If the fusing relay is damaged, replace the PSU (AC Controller Board) Check the connection between PSU (AC Controller Board) and control board, and replace harness and board if necessary If the PSU (AC Controller Board) fuse (24VS) blows out, replace the fuse Zero cross error (low-frequency error) In the event of an error Frequency instability of commercial power line

SC547-03

Turn the main power supply switch OFF/ON Check the power source Check the connection between PSU (AC Controller Board) and control board, and replace harness and board if necessary

SC No. SC549-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Shield Operation Error Detection During HP detection operation, shield sensors 1 and 2 detect "High" for (t30) seconds continuously.

SC549-02

Shield Operation Error Detection During shield basic operation, shield sensor 2 does not go "Low > High" even if (t31) seconds elapsed from screen motor rotation start.

507

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Shield Operation Error Detection

SC549-03

During shield basic operation, shield motor does not stop even if (t32) seconds elapsed from rotation start. Shield Operation Error Detection During HP detection operation, HP detection fails 3 times consecutively. Motor defective Sensor defective Sensor actuator/feeler modification/defective Shield modification/defective Replace the motor Replace the HP sensor Replace the fusing unit

SC549-04

SC No. SC551-01

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Edge Thermopile Disconnection Below -50 degrees C (or below CB) is detected for (t11) seconds continuously. Thermopile disconnection Connector disconnected Replace the thermopile Reset the connector Replace the connector Replace the fusing unit

508

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC551-02

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Edge NC Sensor Disconnection 3ED - 3FF (FB voltage: 3.243V-3.300V) is detected for (t13) seconds continuously (NC sensor center: detection & compensation NC sensor edge: detection & compensation). Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more. NC sensor disconnection Connector disconnected Replace the NC sensor Reset the connector Replace the connector Replace the fusing unit Edge NC Sensor Short-circuit AD value: 0-13 (FB voltage: 0.000V-0.041V) (*3) is detected for (t14) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100 ms, detection frequency: 10 times or more.

SC551-03

NC sensor short-circuit Connector disconnected Replace the NC sensor Reset the connector Replace the connector Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC552-02

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Central Thermopile Does Not Reload (T21) degrees C not reached after heater 1 ON for (t3) seconds.

SC552-03

Fusing Central Thermopile Does Not Reload Heating edge reload permission temperature not reached after heater 1 ON for (t312) seconds.

509

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Thermopile lens dirt Thermopile modification, float Outside input voltage guarantee After excessive temperature rise prevention unit operation Replace the thermopile. Make sure that the input voltage is within acceptable limits. Replace the fusing unit.

SC No. SC553-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing End Thermopile High Temperature Detection (software) Above (T3) degrees C detected for (t4) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Triac short-circuit IOB defective BCU defective Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC554-01

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing end thermopile high temperature detection (hardware) In the event of an error Triac defective (short-circuit) Engine controller defective Heating edge thermopile defective Fusing control software: out of control If the triac is defective, replace the AC power supply board If necessary, replace the BCU or heating edge thermopile

510

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC554-02

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing end NC sensor high temperature detection (hardware) In the event of an error Triac defective (short-circuit) Engine controller defective Heating edge thermopile defective Fusing control software: out of control Attach the new fusing unit, then run SP-5-810-002 If necessary, replace the BCU or Fusing edge NC sensor

SC No. SC555-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Edge Heater Continuously Heat After waiting for full power for more than (t6) seconds continuously, not detected for (t8) seconds. Definition of heater full power Continuously heating rate set point (maximum heating rate) Measurement start point After reload (after heater extinguished, after rotation complete) below the standby temperature (target temperature), measurement starts after a heater heat-up request is issued. Measurement stop condition Rotation started due to a print signal during measurement or other Maximum heat-up Duty (SP interlinked value) 0% is excluded Thermistor deformation/float Heater disconnection After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation Replace the thermistor Replace the fusing lamp Replace the fusing unit

511

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC557-00

Level C

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Zero Cross Frequency Exceeded In the event of an error Frequency instability of commercial power line/Noise -

SC No. SC559-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Fusing Jam Detected for 3 Times Consecutively Fusing jam (does not reach fusing exit sensor) is detected for 3 times consecutively. Detection conditions Displays the SC559-00 at the time of integrating the counter each time fusing jam occurs, became fusing jam counter value = 3. The counter value is retained without fusing jam also reset by OFF/ON the power supply. Control ON/OFF And enables ON / OFF is this SC, the default is set to OFF, then ON at the time of customer requirements. SP1-142-001 0: OFF (default), 1: ON (Set at the time of customer requirements) Counter reset condition occurs fusing jam 1. Normal paper exit has been done during this continuous fusing jam, fusing jam counter is reset. 2. When "1" is changed to "0" SP1-142-001, to reset the (SP9-912-001) fusing jam counter. When after displaying SC559, SC release is made, reset the (SP9912-001) fusing jam counter. Fusing unit paper jam Remove the jam

512

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC561-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Central Thermistor Disconnection Below 0 degree C (or below 3F9) detected for (t12) seconds continuously. Detection period 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Thermistor disconnection Connector disconnected Replace the thermistor Reset the connector Replace the connector Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC562-02

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Central Thermistor Does Not Reload Does not reach (T21) degree C after heater 1ON for (t3) seconds. Thermistor dirt Thermistor deformation, float Outside input voltage guarantee After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation Replace the thermistor Make sure that the input voltage is within acceptable limits Replace the fusing unit

513

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC563-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Central Thermistor High Temperature Detection (software) Above (T3) degrees C detected for (t4) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Triac short-circuit IOB defective BCU defective Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC564-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Central Thermistor High Temperature Detection (hardware) Above (T4) degrees C detected Triac short-circuit IOB controller defective BCU controller defective Fusing control: out of control Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

514

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC569-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Paper Exit/ Pressure Release Motor Error Detection Retry operation fails 3 times consecutively. Motor defective Sensor defective Filler modification, defective Replace the paper exit/ pressure release motor. Replace the pressure roller HP sensor. Replace the fusing unit.

SC No. SC571-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Edge Thermistor Disconnection Below 0 degree C (or above 3F9) detected for (t12) continuously. Detection period: 100 ms, detection counts: 10 times or more. Thermistor disconnection Connector disconnected Replace the thermistor Reset the connector Replace the connector Replace the fusing unit

515

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC572-04

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Edge Thermistor Does Not Reload After starting continuous job with paper width of 257mm or more, does not reach (T22) degrees C after (t313) seconds. Thermistor dirt Thermistor deformation, float Outside input voltage guarantee After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation Replace the thermistor Make sure that the input voltage is within acceptable limits Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC573-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Edge Thermistor High Temperature Detection (software) Above (T3) degrees C detected for (t4) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Triac short-circuit IOB defective BCU defective Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

516

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC574-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Edge Thermistor High Temperature Detection (hardware) Above (T4) degrees C detected Triac short-circuit IOB defective BCU defective Fusing control: out of control Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC581-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Expanded Edge Thermistor Disconnection Below 0 degree C (or above 3F9) detected for (t12) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Thermistor disconnection Connector disconnected Replace the thermistor Reset the connector Replace the connector Replace the fusing unit

517

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC582-04

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Expanded Edge Thermistor Does Not Reload After starting continuous job with paper width of 257mm or more, does not reach (T22) degrees C after (t313) seconds. Thermistor dirt Thermistor deformation, float Outside input voltage guarantee After excess temperature rise prevention unit operation Replace the thermistor Make sure that the input voltage is within acceptable limits Replace the fusing unit

SC No. SC583-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Expanded Edge Thermistor High Temperature Detection (software) Above (T3) degrees C detected for (t4) seconds continuously. Detection period: 100ms, detection count: 10 times or more. Triac short-circuit IOB defective BCU defective Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

518

Service Call 501-584

SC No. SC584-00

Level A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Pressurized Expanded Edge Thermistor High Temperature Detection (hardware) Above (T4) degrees C detected Triac short-circuit IOB controller defective BCU controller defective Fusing control: out of control Replace the IOB Replace the BCU Replace the fusing unit

519

5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 620-689

SC600 (Engine: Communication and Others)
SC No. SC620-01 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution ADF Communication error After ADF connection was recognized on startup, an error is detected. (disconnection detection) SC620-02 D ADF Communication Error After ADF connection was recognized on startup, an error is detected. (Retry out due to communication error) ADF connection fault ADF defection IPU board defection Noise contamination Check the ADF cable connection Replace the ADF Replace the IPU board

520

Service Call 620-689

SC No. SC621-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Finisher communication error Detected an error when connecting the communication line. Received a communication error notification from the URAT. Finisher control board defective. BCU defective IOB defective Connection fault between finisher and main machine. Reconnect the Finisher interface cable Replace the BCU Replace the finisher Turn the power off/on

SC No. SC622-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Paper bank communication error Detected an error when connecting the communication line. Received a communication error notification from the URAT. Paper bank control board defective BCU defective IOB defective Paper bank-main machine connection fault Reconnect the optional paper tray connection cable Replace the BCU Replace the optional paper tray Turn the power off/on

521

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC623-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution 2nd bank communication error During superposition of single bank - double bank, double bank - side LICT, and LCIT - side LCIT, 1. When the upper bank side recognizes the lower bank, the break of the lower bank is not canceled within t5ms. 2. After the upper bank side recognizes the lower bank, there is no ACK within t6ms after transmission of a data frame to the lower bank, and a timeout error occurs for 3 times consecutively even if retransmission is performed (Bank/LCIT transmits "between bank 1 - bank 2: communication error" to the main machine.) Bank control board fault Connector disconnected Reset the optional paper tray connecting cable Replace the BCU Replace the optional paper tray Turn the power off/on

SC No. SC664 SC664-01 SC664-02 SC664-03

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution ASIC on the IOB SRAM program expansion error

D D D

Access permission error to ASIC on the IOB SRAM (write permission fails) Write error to ASIC on the IOB SRAM (write result error) ASIC on the IOB program startup error Noise Hardware defection Replace the imaging IOB and paper transport IOB Check the harness

522

Service Call 620-689

SC No. SC665

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution FFC set detection FFC set error is detected by port lead and AD value read-out

SC665-01

BCU-IPU connection error SC display LED blink mode correction on BCU

SC665-02

BCU - imaging IOB connection error SC display

SC665-03

BCU - paper transport IOB connection error SC display

SC No. SC669 SC669-01 SC669-02 SC669-03 SC669-04 SC669-05 SC669-06 SC669-07 SC669-08 SC669-09 SC669-10 SC669-11 SC669-12 SC669-13

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution EEPROM Communication Error

D D D D D D D D D D D D D

EEPROM OPEN: ID error EEPROM OPEN: Channel error EEPROM OPEN: Device error EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full EEPROM OPEN: No error code EEPROM CLOSE: ID error EEPROM CLOSE: No error code EEPROM Data write: ID error EEPROM Data write: Channel error EEPROM Data write: Device error

523

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC669-14 SC669-15 SC669-16 SC669-17 SC669-18 SC669-19 SC669-20 SC669-21 SC669-22 SC669-23 SC669-24 SC669-25 SC669-26 SC669-27 SC669-28 SC669-29 SC669-30 SC669-31 SC669-32 SC669-33 SC669-34

Level D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error EEPROM Data write: Buffer full EEPROM Data write: No error code EEPROM Data read: ID error EEPROM Data read: Channel error EEPROM Data read: Device error EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error EEPROM Data read: Buffer full EEPROM Data read: No error code EEPROM Device detection: ID error EEPROM Device detection: Channel error EEPROM Device detection: Device error EEPROM Device detection: Communication abort error EEPROM Device detection: Communication timeout error EEPROM Device detection: Operation stopped error EEPROM Device detection: Buffer full EEPROM Device detection: No error code

524

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Electrical noise EEPROM not connected fully EEPROM not installed EEPROM damaged BCU damaged Turn the power off/on Reconnect the EEPROM Replace the EEPROM Replace the BCU

SC No. SC68101 - 04 06 - 09 11 - 14 16 - 19 21 - 24 26 - 29 31 - 34 36 - 39

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Toner Cartridge: ID Chip Communication Error

D D D D D D D D

Invalid Device ID Channel error Device Error Communication aborted (error during communication) Communication timeout Device stopped (logically stopped) Requested buffer full No error code

525

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution When abnormality occurs at cable connection When error notification was received during communication with the tag and operation is not resumed after 3 retries. There was an error during (wired) communication with the ID chip on the toner bottle. Replace the toner bottle SC branch number: 01, 06, 11, 16, 21, 26, 31, 36: K 02, 07, 12, 17, 22, 27, 32, 37: M 03, 08, 13, 18, 23, 28, 33, 38: C 04, 09, 14, 19, 24, 29, 34, 39: Y

SC No. SC68201 - 04 06 - 09 11 - 14 16 - 19 21 - 24 26 - 29 31 - 34 36 - 39

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution PCU: ID Chip Communication Error

D D D D D D D D

Invalid Device ID Channel error Device Error Communication aborted (error during communication) Communication timeout Device stopped (logically stopped) Requested buffer full No error code

526

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution When error notification was received during communication with the tag and operation is not resumed after 3 retries. HST sensor defective EEPROM defective PCU set error Suffix number (right edge) shows each color described below: 1, 6: K, 2, 7: Magenta, 3, 8: Cyan, 4, 9: Yellow 01, 06, 11, 16, 21, 26, 31, 36: K 02, 07, 12, 17, 22, 27, 32, 37: M 03, 08, 13, 18, 23, 28, 33, 38: C 04, 09, 14, 19, 24, 29, 34, 39: Y Example: 682-21 is for black PCDU. 01 04 Device ID data corruption 06 09 Connection fault (bus disconnect, etc.) 11 - 14 No ID chip 16 19, 21 24, 26 - 29 Noise 31 - 34, 36 - 39 Software defection Replace the PCU

SC No. SC687-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution PER Not Received Error Unable to receive the PER command from the controller. Communication error Replace the BCU

527

5. Troubleshooting

SC600 (Controller)
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Counter device error 1 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms. SC632-00 B Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged. Turn the main power off/on. Check the serial communication line. SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Counter device error 2 After communication was established, the controller received the brake signal from the accounting device. SC633-00 B Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged. Turn the main power off/on. Check the serial communication line. SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Counter device error 3 A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device. SC634-00 B Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device defective Replace the counter device control board. Replace the backup battery.

528

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Counter device error 4 A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.

SC635-00

Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device defective Replace the counter device control board. Replace the backup battery.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution IC Card Error (Expanded authentication module error) Issued when expanded authentication management is set to "ON" but either of the following occur. There is no expanded authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken. There is no DESS module in the machine.

SC636-01

There is no DESS module in the machine (models on which the function is optional). There is no expanded authentication module in the machine. The SD card or the file of the expanded authentication module is broken. Set a working SD card/expanded authentication module file. Install the DESS module. In the SSP mode set SP5-401-160 to 0. In the SSP mode, set SP5-401-161 to 0. Replace the NVRAM.

529

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution IC Card Error (Version error)

SC636-02

The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct. Incorrect module version Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution IC Card Error (OSM user code file error) The correct "usercode" file could not be found in the root folder of the SD card. The "usercode" file on the SD card could not be read. The "usercode" file does not exist on the SD card.

SC636-11

The "usercode" file on the SD card is an invalid file. Data in the "usercode" file on the SD card is invalid. "usercode" file was not moved when moving the application to another SD card Use the user code configuration tool for OSM users (Idissuer.exe) to create the "usercode" and store it in the root folder of the SD card containing the IC card module (eccm.mod).

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Tracking Information Notification Error (Tracking application error) Tracking information was lost.

SC637-01

Tracking SDK application error Internal notification error Turn the main power off/on.

530

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Tracking Information Notification Error (Management server error) Tracking information was lost. Communication with tracking management server failed.

SC637-02

Network error tracking management server error Tracking SDK application error Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Remote Service Modem Communication Error (Dialup authentication failure) An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on. Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating. SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because it can be referenced using SP). Dialup authentication failure Check the following SPs. SP5-816-156 SP5-816-157

SC650-01

531

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Remote Service Modem Communication Error (dialup failing because of incorrect modem configuration) An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.

SC650-04

Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating. SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because it can be referenced using SP). Dialup failing because of incorrect modem configuration Check if the setting of SP5-816-160 is correct. If it is correct, then there is a software bug.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Remote Service Modem Communication Error (insufficient current or connection fault) An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.

SC650-05

Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating. SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because it can be referenced using SP). Insufficient current or connection fault The line is not supported and nothing can be done.

532

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type Mwas installed but modem is not present (detected during operation)) An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on. Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating.

SC650-13

SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because it can be referenced using SP). RC Gate Type Mwas installed but modem is not present (detected during operation) If a modem board is not installed, install it. Check again if the modem driver configurations (SP5-816-160, SP5-816-165 to 171, SP5-816-165 to 171) are correct. If the problem is not solved, replace the modem.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type N was installed but modem is present or wired/wireless LAN is not working correctly) An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.) using the RC Gate was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate operation was detected at power on.

SC650-14

Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating. SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because it can be referenced using SP). RC Gate Type N was installed but modem is present or wired/wireless LAN is not working correctly If a modem board is attached, remove it. Check if wired/wireless LAN works.

533

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat program parameter error) An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate Type M dialed up the NRS Center. Software bug Logging only.

SC651-01

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat program execution error)

SC651-02

An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate dialed up the NRS Center. Software bug Logging only.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Remote service ID2 mismatching There was an authentication mismatch between ID2 for @Remote, the controller board, and NVRAM. Used controller board installed Used NVRAM installed (such action is not allowed.)

SC652-00

If this occurs during RC Gate installation: Check the validity of the certificate and the NVRAM, check the machine serial number, write the common certificate, and then begin installation again. If this occurs after RC Gate installation: Clear the RC Gate install status, check the validity of the certificate and the NVRAM, check the machine serial number, write the common certificate, and then begin installation again.

534

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Incorrect remote service ID2 ID2 stored in the NVRAM has either of the following problems. Number of characters is not 17. Includes a character that cannot be printed.

SC653-00

All spaces NULL Replace the NVRAM. Clear the RC Gate install status, write the common certificate, and then begin installation again.

SC No. SC670-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Engine start up error Case 1 /ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on or returned from energy saver mode. /IPURDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on or returned from energy saver mode. EC response was not received within specified time from power on. PC response was not received within specified time from power on. SC response was not received within specified time from power on. Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI). Case 2 Unexpected down status was detected after /ENGRDY assertion. Case 1 Engine board does not start up. Case 2 Engine board reset unexpectedly. 535

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Check the connection between the engine board and the controller board. If it is always reproduced, replace the engine board. If the problem persists, consider replacing the controller board or other boards between them. If reproducibility is low, multiple causes are to be considered, such as software, engine board, controller board, and PSU.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Controller start up error After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established. Controller stalled Board installed incorrectly Controller board defective Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective Controller late Turn the main power off/on. Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Check the control panel harness.

SC672-10

536

Service Call 620-689

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Controller start up error After the machine was powered on, communication between the controller and the operation panel was not established, or communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup. Controller stalled Board installed incorrectly

SC672-11

Controller board defective Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective Controller late Turn the main power off/on. Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Check the control panel harness.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Controller start up error Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup. Controller stalled Board installed incorrectly Controller board defective

SC672-12

Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective Controller late Turn the main power off/on. Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Check the control panel harness.

537

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Controller start up error The operation panel detected that the controller is down. Controller stalled Board installed incorrectly Controller board defective

SC672-13

Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective Controller late Turn the main power off/on. Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Check the control panel harness.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Controller start up error The operation panel software ended abnormally. Controller stalled Board installed incorrectly Controller board defective

SC672-99

Operation panel connector loose, broken, or defective Controller late Turn the main power off/on. Check the connection of the controller board. Replace the controller board. Check the control panel harness.

538

Service Call 700-792

Service Call 700-792

SC700 (Engine: Peripherals)
SC No. SC701-03 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Paper Feed Motor Driver Error (ARDF) Detection of error signal from motor driver Encoder disconnection Encoder connector dropout Encoder defective Overload Motor deterioration Replace the encoder harness Check the harness connection Replace the motor SC701-08 D Paper Exit Motor Driver Error (ARDF) Detection of error signal from motor driver. Encoder disconnection Encoder connector dropout Encoder defective Overload Motor deterioration Replace the encoder harness Check the harness connection Replace the motor

539

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC702-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Protection Device Intercept Error 1 (ARDF) When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V power supply system is detected. Any of feed motor, transport motor, reverse solenoid, paper feed solenoid, paper feed clutch and FAN motor defective, a harness shortcircuit occurs, and the protection device of the 24V power supply system intercepts. Replace the blown fuse or circuit board Replace the short-circuited parts Protection Device Intercept Error 2 (ARDF) When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V OUT power supply system is detected.

SC702-02

Solenoid defective or harness short-circuit occurs in 24VOUT power supply system. Replace the blown fuse or circuit board Replace the short-circuited parts Protection Device Intercept Error 3 (ARDF) When original source 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 5VE power supply system is detected.

SC702-03

Sensor defective or a harness short-circuit occur in 5VE power supply system. Replace the blown fuse or circuit board Replace the short-circuited parts

540

Service Call 700-792

SC No. SC723-03

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Power Supply Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind) When original source 24V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of non-interlock power supply system is detected. A motor failure or harness short-circuit occur in the non-interlock power supply system. Replace the short-circuited harnesses Replace the protection devices

SC723-10

Transport Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind) The DCM driver error detection is started after reset, and T9[msec] error signal is detected. This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times. Transport Motor failure Harness short-circuit Circuit board failure Over current Abnormal temperature Replace the motor Replace the harness Replace the circuit board.

541

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Junction Solenoid Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind) When the junction claw HP sensor was not turned off while T3[msec] applied to the solenoid motor with the HP sensor turned on. When the junction claw HP sensor was not turned on while T4[msec] applied to the solenoid motor with the HP sensor turned off. This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.

SC723-20

Junction Solenoid Motor failure Connector disconnected Over load Junction claw HP sensor error Check the connection Replace the motor/sensor Replace the harness Exit Pressure Release Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind) When the exit pressure release HP sensor was not turned off while T5[msec] applied to the exit pressure release motor with the HP sensor turned on. When exit pressure release HP sensor was not turned on while T6[msec] applied to the exit pressure release motor with the HP sensor turned off. This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times.

SC723-24

Exit Pressure Release Motor failure Connector disconnected Over load Exit pressure release HP sensor error Check the connection Replace the motor/sensor Replace the harness

542

Service Call 700-792

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Stapler Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind) When the stapler HP sensor was not turned off while T7[msec] applied to the stapler motor with the HP sensor turned on. When stapler HP sensor was not turned on while T6[msec] applied to the stapler motor with the HP sensor turned off. The STM driver error detection is started after reset, and T9[msec] error signal is detected. This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times. Stapler Motor failure

SC723-44

Connector disconnected Stapler Motor overload Stapler HP sensor error Harness short-circuit Circuit board failure Excess current Abnormal temperature Check the connection Replace the motor/sensor Replace the harness Replace the circuit board

543

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Shift Motor Error (Internal Finisher: Non-Staple Bind) When the shift HP sensor was not turned off while T1[msec] applied to the shift motor with the HP sensor turned on. When shift HP sensor was not turned on while T6[msec] applied to the shift motor with the HP sensor turned off. The STM driver error detection is started after reset, and T9[msec] error signal is detected. This SC will be issued when the above phenomenon repeated 2 times. Shift Motor failure

SC723-71

Connector disconnected Shift Motor overload Shift HP sensor error Harness short-circuit Circuit board failure Excess current Abnormal temperature Check the connection Replace the motor/sensor Replace the harness Replace the circuit board

SC No. SC724 SC724-24

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Internal finisher Error

Paper Exit Guide Plate Open/Close Motor Error (Internal finisher) When paper exit guide plate open/close motor is driven for T3 msec after paper exit guide plate HP sensor ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When paper exit guide plate open/close motor is driven for T4 msec after paper exit guide plate HP sensor OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

544

Service Call 700-792

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Punch Motor Error (Internal finisher) When punch motor is driven for T16 msec after punch HP sensor ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When punch motor is driven for T17 msec after punch HP sensor OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Punch Displacement Motor Error (Internal finisher) When punch displacement motor is driven for T18 msec when punch displacement HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When punch displacement motor is driven for T19 msec when punch displacement HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Punch Horizontal Registration Detection Motor Error (Internal finisher) When horizontal registration displacement motor is driven for T20 msec when horizontal registration displacement HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When horizontal registration displacement motor is driven for T21 msec when horizontal registration displacement HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Jogger Front Motor Error (Internal finisher) When front jogger motor is driven for T22 msec when front jogger HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When front jogger motor is driven for T23 msec when front jogger HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SC724-25

SC724-27

SC724-28

SC724-31

545

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Jogger Rear Motor Error (Internal finisher) When rear jogger motor is driven for T24 msec when rear jogger HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When rear jogger motor is driven for T25 msec when rear jogger HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Strike Roller Motor Error (Internal finisher) During initialization/strike descent, even when the strike roller motor is driven for T1 msec when the strike roller HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SC724-32

SC724-33

During initialization, even when the strike roller motor is driven for T2 msec when the strike roller HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When the strike roller is lifted from the press position, even when driven for T2 msec, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Paper Press Motor Error (Internal finisher) When the paper press HP sensor is ON and the paper press motor is driven for T14 msec, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). When the paper press HP sensor is OFF and the paper press motor is driven for T15 msec, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Stapler Displacement Movable Motor Error (Internal finisher) Sifter stapler displacement HP sensor ON, even when the stapler displacement motor is driven for T9 msec, the HP sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). After stapler displacement HP sensor OFF, even when the stapler displacement motor is driven for T10 msec, the HP sensor does not switch ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SC724-38

SC724-42

546

Service Call 700-792

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Shift Tray Ascent/Descent Motor Error (Internal finisher) During ascent from paper surface sensor ON, even after T11 msec elapses, the paper surface sensor does not switch OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SC724-70

During descent from paper surface sensor OFF, the paper surface sensor does not switch ON even after T12 msec elapses (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). During descent to the packing position, the full sensor does not switch ON even if T13 msec elapses. Shift Motor Error (Internal finisher) When the shift roller HP sensor is ON, the HP sensor does not switch OFF even when the shift roller motor is driven for T5 msec (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification) When the shift roller HP sensor is OFF, the HP sensor does not switch ON even when the shift roller motor is driven for T6 msec (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). Stapler Motor Error (Internal finisher) HP sensor does not switch OFF even when the stapler motor is driven for T7 msec after the stapler HP sensor switches ON (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification). HP sensor does not switch ON even when the stapler motor is driven for T8 msec after the stapler HP sensor switches OFF (1st time is jam notification, 2nd time is SC notification).

SC724-80

SC724-86

547

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Motor defective Connector disconnected Motor overload Home position sensor error Paper surface sensor error (*SC724-38, 70 only) Staple jam (*SC724-86 only) Reset the connector Replace the motor Replace the sensor Replace the harness Remove the staple jam (*SC724-86 only)

SC No. SC761 SC761-03 SC761-04

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Protection Device Intercept Error *V (bridge unit or left paper output tray)

B B

Protection Device Intercept Error 5V Protection Device Intercept Error 24V Fuse blowout occurs due to over current during power injection (output detected for longer than 2 seconds). Over current of bridge unit motor Over current due to short-circuit in PCB Replace the bridge unit Replace the PCB

SC No. SC780-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Bank 1 (Upper optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error

548

Service Call 700-792

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution When original source of 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V power system is detected. In 24V power supply system: Motor defective Solenoid defective Harness short- circuit Replace the PCB Replace the short-circuited part (harness, motor, solenoid)

SC No. SC781-01

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Bank 2 (Lower optional paper tray) Protection Device Intercept Error When original source of 5V power supply is ON, protection device intercept of 24V power system is detected. In 24V power supply system: Motor defective Solenoid defective Harness short- circuit Replace the PCB Replace the short-circuited part (harness, motor, solenoid)

SC No. SC791-00

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution No bridge unit when finisher is present When power supply is switched on or paper is transported, finisher set is detected but bridge unit set is not detected. (during internal finisher connection, not detected) Bridge unit not attached Bridge unit defective Reset the bridge unit Turn the power off/on

549

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC792-00

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution No finisher, bridge unit provided When power supply is switched on, it is recognized there is no finisher, and a bridge unit is fitted. Finisher connector set fault In a machine which has a bridge unit connected, a finisher is not fitted Finisher defective Connect finisher or disconnect bridge unit, and turn the power off/on

550

Service Call 816-899

Service Call 816-899

SC800 (Controller)
SC No. SC816 SC816-01 SC816-02 SC816-03 SC816-04 SC816-05 SC816-07 SC816-08 SC816-09 SC816-10 SC816-11 SC816-12 SC816-13 SC816-14 SC816-15 SC816-16 SC816-17 SC816-18 SC816-19 SC816-20 SC816-22 Level [0x0000] D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Energy save I/O subsystem error Subsystem error Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Transition to STR was denied. Interrupt in kernel communication driver Preparation for transition to STR failed. Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error open() error Memory address error open() error open() error open() error open() error Double open() error open() error Parameter error

551

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC816-23 SC816-24 SC816-25 SC816-26 SC816-27 SC816-28 SC816-29 SC816-30 SC816-35 SC816-36 SC816-37 SC816-38 SC816-39 SC816-40 SC816-41 SC816-42 SC816-43 SC816-44 SC816-45 SC816-46 SC816-47 SC816-48 SC816-49 SC816-50 SC816-51 552

Level D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution read() error read() error read() error write() communication retry error write() communication retry error write() communication retry error write() communication retry error write() communication retry error read() error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error

Service Call 816-899

SC No. SC816-52 SC816-53 SC816-54 SC816-55 SC816-56 SC816-57 SC816-58 SC816-59 SC816-60 SC816-61 SC816-62 SC816-63 SC816-64 SC816-65 SC816-66 SC816-67 SC816-68 SC816-69 SC816-70 SC816-71 SC816-72 SC816-73 SC816-74 SC816-75 SC816-76

Level D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error 553

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC816-77 SC816-78 SC816-79 SC816-80 SC816-81 SC816-82 SC816-83 SC816-84 SC816-85 SC816-86 SC816-87 SC816-88 SC816-89 SC816-90 SC816-91 SC816-92 SC816-93 SC816-94

Level D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Subsystem error Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality. Energy save I/O subsystem defective Energy save I/O subsystem detected a controller board error (nonresponse). Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR. Turn the main power off/on. Replace the controller board.

554

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution EEPROM access error An error occurred during I/O processing.

SC840-00

A read error occurred and 3 retries failed. A write error occurred. EEPROM defective or end-of-life -

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution EEPROM read data error Compared the data from 3 areas of the EEPROM mirror data with the original data and all 3 of them were different from the original data. Data in the specific area of the EEPROM has been modified. -

SC841-00

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Nand-Flash updating verification error During remote ROM update or ROM update, the SCS detected a write error (verify error) regarding the data written to the Nand-Flash. Nand-Flash damaged Turn the main power off/on.

SC842-00

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Nand-Flash bad block number exceeding the threshold When the status of the Nand-Flash was checked at power-on or when returning from energy saver mode, the number of bad blocks exceeded the threshold. Nand-Flash bad block number exceeding the threshold Replace the controller board.

SC842-01

555

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Number of times of Nand-Flash block erase exceeding the threshold When the status of the Nand-Flash was checked at power-on or when returning from energy saver mode, the number of times the block was erased exceeded the threshold. Number of times of Nand-Flash block erase exceeding the threshold Replace the controller board.

SC842-02

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Bluetooth device connection error The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine was turned on. The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was connected after the machine was turned on. Turn the main power with the Bluetooth hardware (USB type) connected.

SC853-00

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Bluetooth device disconnected The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the machine was turned on. The Bluetooth hardware (USB type) was disconnected after the machine was turned on. Turn the main power with the Bluetooth hardware (USB type) connected.

SC854-00

556

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Wireless LAN board error (driver attachment failure) Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)

SC855-01

Defective wireless LAN board Loose connection Turn the main power off/on. Replace wireless LAN board

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Wireless LAN board error (driver initialization failure) Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)

SC855-02

Defective wireless LAN board Loose connection Turn the main power off/on. Replace wireless LAN board

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution USB I/F Error The USB interface is unusable because of a driver error.

SC857-00

USB driver error (There are three causes of USB error: RX error/CRC error/STALL. SC is issued only in the case of STALL.) Check USB connection. Replace the controller board.

557

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion error (HDD Key Setting Error) A serious error occurred during an attempt to update the encryption key.

SC858-01

Data in the USB Flash etc. corrupted Communication error because of electromagnetic interference etc. Controller board defective Replace the board.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM read/write error) A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the encryption key. NVRAM defective Replace the board.

SC858-02

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion error (NVRAM Before Replace error) A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the encryption key. Software error such as conversion parameters being invalid. Replace the board.

SC858-30

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion error (Other Error) A serious error occurred after data conversion during an attempt to update the encryption key. Controller board defective Replace the board.

SC858-31

558

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (HDD check error) HDD was not converted correctly during an attempt to update the encryption key. Only an error screen is displayed and no SC is issued during conversion. This SC is issued after machine restart.

SC859-01

HDD conversion was selected in the Encryption key update function but the machine was turned on with the HDD removed. Power failure occurred during encryption key update. HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update due to HDD errors or cable noises. Check HDD connection. Format the HDD. If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Power failure during conversion) HDD was not converted correctly during an attempt to update the encryption key. Only an error screen is displayed and no SC is issued during conversion. This SC is issued after machine restart. Details: NVRAM/HDD conversion is incomplete. Power failure occurred during encryption key update. None The display after restart instructs the user to format the HDD.

SC859-02

559

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data encryption conversion HDD conversion error (Data read/write command error) HDD was not converted correctly during an attempt to update the encryption key. Only an error screen is displayed and no SC is issued during conversion. This SC is issued after machine restart. Details:

SC859-10

Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two or more times (DMAC timeout, serial communication error etc.) HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update due to HDD errors or cable noises. Check HDD connection. Format the HDD. If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC No. SC860-00

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD startup error at main power on (HDD error)

560

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following errors. SS_NOT_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/ SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/ SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or checking the label*/ SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or checking the label*/ SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/ SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/ SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to command*/ SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/ SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/ SS_NO_PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not exist*/ SS_NO_FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/ Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has been no response for 30 seconds or more. Unformatted HDD Label data corrupted HDD defective Format the HDD through SP mode.

561

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the disklabel area.) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short. Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

SC863-01

SC No. SC863-02

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "a".)

562

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short. Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "b".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-03

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

563

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "c".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-04

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

564

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "d".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-05

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

565

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "e".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-06

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

566

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "f".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-07

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

567

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "g".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-08

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

568

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "h".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-09

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

569

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "i".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-10

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

570

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "j".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-11

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

571

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "k".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-12

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

572

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "l".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-13

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

573

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "m".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-14

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

574

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "n".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-15

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

575

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "o".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-16

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

576

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "p".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-17

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

577

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "q".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-18

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

578

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "r.) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-19

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

579

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "r.) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-20

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

580

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "t) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-21

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

581

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "u".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-22

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

582

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data read failure The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally. Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "y".) Guide for when to replace the HDD 1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more The interval is short.

SC863-23

Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.). Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned on. 2. It takes a long time after main power on for the operation panel to become ready. HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after main power on is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data and check them.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error. Bad sectors were generated during operation.

SC864-01

(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the disklabel area.) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

583

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-02

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "a".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-03

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "b".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-04

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "c".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

584

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-05

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "d".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-06

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "e".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-07

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "f".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

585

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-08

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "g".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-09

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "h".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-10

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "i".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

586

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-11

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "j".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-12

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "k".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-13

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "l".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

587

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-14

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "m".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-15

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "n".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-16

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "o".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

588

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-17

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "p".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-18

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "q".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-19

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "r".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

589

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-20

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "s".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-21

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "t".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-22

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "u".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

590

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD data CRC error During HDD operation, the HDD returned a CRC error.

SC864-23

Bad sectors were generated during operation. (An error occurred in partition "v".) Format the HDD. Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-00

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-01

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the disklabel area.) Replace the HDD.

591

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-02

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "a".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-03

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "b".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-03

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "c".) Replace the HDD.

592

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-05

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "d".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-06

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "e".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-07

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "f".) Replace the HDD.

593

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-08

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "g".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-09

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "h".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-10

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "i".) Replace the HDD.

594

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-11

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "j".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-12

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "k".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-13

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "l".) Replace the HDD.

595

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-14

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "m".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-15

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "n".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-16

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "o".) Replace the HDD.

596

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-17

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "p".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-18

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "q".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-19

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "r".) Replace the HDD.

597

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-20

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "s".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-21

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "t".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-22

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "u".) Replace the HDD.

598

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD access error During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.

SC865-23

The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or SC864 (CRC error). (An error occurred in partition "v".) Replace the HDD.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card authentication error A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was detected. Invalid program data is stored on the SD card. Store a valid program data on the SD card.

SC866-00

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card removed The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot.

SC867-00

The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot (mount point of /mnt/sd0). Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card removed The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot.

SC867-01

The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot (mount point of /mnt/sd1). Turn the main power off/on.

599

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card removed The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot.

SC867-02

The SD card that starts an application was removed from the slot (mount point of /mnt/sd2). Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card access error The SD controller returned an error during operation. (Error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd0) SD card defective

SC868-00

SD controller defective Reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).* Check the SD card insertion status. Replace the SD card. Replace the controller board.

* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card access error The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SC868-01

(Error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd1) SD card defective SD controller defective

600

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card that starts an application Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on. If an error occurs, replace the SD card. SD card for users In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).* In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on. If an error occurs, use another SD card.

* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card access error The SD controller returned an error during operation.

SC868-02

(Error occurred at the mount point of /mnt/sd1) SD card defective SD controller defective

601

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution SD card that starts an application Turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on. If an error occurs, replace the SD card. SD card for users In case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).* In case of a device access error, turn the main power off and check the SD card insertion status. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power on. If an error occurs, use another SD card.

* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.

SC No. SC870-00 SC870-01 SC870-02 SC870-03 SC870-04 SC870-05 SC870-06 SC870-07

Level B B B B B B B B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.) Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the Address Book is missing.) Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the module required for encryption (DESS) is missing.) Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store internal Address Book.) Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery sender.) Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store delivery destination.) Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store information required for LDAP search.) Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries required for machine operation.)

602

Service Call 816-899

SC No. SC870-08

Level B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the space for storing the Address Book is unusable.) Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the NVRAM area used for storing settings required for Address Book configuration.) Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a directory for storing the Address Book in the SD/USB FlashROM.) Address Book data error(On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book entry number.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.) Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.) Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.) Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache during LDAP search.) Address Book data error (Search:Failed to obtain data from cache while searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.) Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.) Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the Address Book encryption status.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory required for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)

SC870-09

SC870-10 SC870-11 SC870-20 SC870-21 SC870-22 SC870-23 SC870-24 SC870-25 SC870-26 SC870-27 SC870-30 SC870-31 SC870-32 SC870-41 SC870-50 SC870-51

B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B

603

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC870-52 SC870-53 SC870-54 SC870-55

Level B B B B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from plaintext to encrypted text.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from encrypted text to plaintext.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data inconsistency when reading the encrypted Address Book.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when changing encryption setting.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file that records the encryption key during an attempt to change the encryption setting.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file during an attempt to change the encryption setting.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a directory during an attempt to change the encryption setting.) Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource shortage during an attempt to change the encryption setting.) Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for administrator authentication (06A and later).)

SC870-56

SC870-57 SC870-58 SC870-59 SC870-60

B B B B

604

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or operation. Software bug Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery server/LDAP server) Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key (NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually without formatting the Address Book) Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed or hardware configuration does not match the application configuration. Address Book data corruption was detected. Check the HDD connection. Initialize all UCS settings and address/authentication information (SP5-846-046). Initialize the Address Book partition (SP5-832-006).

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD mail reception error An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on. HDD defective Power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.

SC872-00

Format the HDD (SP5-832-007). Replace the HDD. When you do the above, the following information will be initialized. Partly received partial mail messages. Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on the mail server are handled as new messages).

605

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution HDD mail reception error An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned on. HDD defective Power was turned of while the machine used the HDD.

SC873-00

Format the HDD (SP5-832-007). Replace the HDD. When you do the above, the following information will be initialized. Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP) Administrator mail address Scanner delivery history

SC No. SC875-01 SC875-02

Level D D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Delete all error (HDD erasure) (hddchack i error) Delete all error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure) An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase data/failed to logically format HDD) HDD logical formatting failed. The modules failed to erase data. Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Log Data Error 1 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. Damaged log data file Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC876-01

606

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Log Data Error 2 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation.

SC876-02

Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed. Replace or set again the encryption module. Disable the log encryption setting.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Log Data Error 3 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation.

SC876-03

Inconsistency of encryption key between NV-RAM and HDD. Disable the log encryption setting. Initialize LCS memory (SP5801-019). Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Log Data Error 4 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation.

SC876-04

Log encryption key is disabled but the log data file is encrypted. (NVRAM data corruption) Log encryption key is enabled but the log data file is not encrypted. (NVRAM data corruption) Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

607

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Log Data Error 5 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. Only the NV-RAM has been replaced with one previously used in another machine.

SC876-05

Only the HDD has been replaced with one previously used in another machine. Attach the original NV-RAM. Attach the original HDD. With the configuration that caused the SC, initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Log Data Error 99 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. Other causes -

SC876-99

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Data Overwrite Security card error The "Auto Erase Memory" function of the Data Overwrite Security is set to on but it cannot be done. Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken.

SC877-00

Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed. If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security option SD card and replace the NVRAM. If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power off and reinstall a working Data Overwrite Security option SD card.

608

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TPM electronic authentication error The machine failed TPM electronic authentication.

SC878-00

System hash registered in the TPM did not match the data on the USB flash. System module was updated in an unauthorized manner. USB flash is not working correctly. Replace the board.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution USB Flash error

SC878-01

USB Flash file system error USB Flash file system has been destroyed. Replace the controller board.

SC No.

Level TPM error

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

SC878-02

Error occurred in the TPM or TPM driver. TPM defective Replace the controller board.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution TCSD error Error occurred in TPM software stack.

SC878-03

Unable to start TPM Necessary files missing from the TPM. Replace the controller board.

609

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level MLB error

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution

Reply to MLB access was not returned within a specified time. SC880-00 D MLB defective Replace the MLB. Remove the MLB. SC No. Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Authentication area error Software error detected. This error may occur even if IC card option (ERIE/AYU/Greenland etc.) is not installed. SC881-01 This is caused by accumulation of abnormal authentication information in the software. (User operation will not directly cause it.) Occurs when authentication is done. Example: When a job is sent to the printer/when logged on from the operation panel/when logged on from a Web browser Turn the main power off/on. SC No. SC882-01 Level D Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Smart Operation Panel error (Smart Operation Panel Software Invalid error) Occurs when the validity of the operation unit is not observed. Memory corruption of the operation panel software. Invalid applications are listed in the operation panel. Format the Operation panel through SP mode Updating the firmware

610

Service Call 816-899

SC No.

Level D

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Software performance error (signal reception end) Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.

SC899-00

In case of a hardware defect Replace the hardware. In case of a software error Turn the main power off/on. Try updating the firmware.

611

5. Troubleshooting

Service Call 900-998

SC900 (Engine: Others)
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution CPM setting error 1 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification code. Details: Machine serial number cannot be identified because of BCU replacement or malfunctioning. SC995-01 D Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not match. Enter the machine serial number using SP5-811, and then turn the power on/off. Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously. CPM setting error 2 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification code. Details: SC995-02 D Machine serial number cannot be identified because of NV-RAM replacement or malfunctioning. machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not match. Attach the NV-RAM that was installed previously. Download data on the NV-RAM using SP5-825.

612

Service Call 900-998

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution CPM setting error 3 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification code. Details:

SC995-03

Unable to recognize machine identification code because the controller was replaced incorrectly or is malfunctioning. machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not match. Replace it with a specified controller. CPM setting error 4 Comparison of machine serial number (11 digits) and machine identification code.

SC995-04

machine serial number (11 digits) or machine identification code does not match. Return the parts to the original configuration, and then replace them according to the manual.

SC900 (Controller)
SC No. Level Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Electric counter error The electric total counter value is out of specification. Error is detected when increasing the total counter. Unexpected NV-RAM is attached. SC900-00 D NV-RAM defective NV-RAM data corrupted. Data written to unexpected area because of external factor etc. The count requested by the SRM on receiving PRT is not completed. Replace the NV-RAM.

613

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External Controller Error 1

SC910-00

Notification from external application (external controller) Subject to external application (external controller) specification Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External Controller Error 2

SC911-00

Notification from external application (external controller) Subject to external application (external controller) specification Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External Controller Error 3

SC912-00

Notification from external application (external controller) Subject to external application (external controller) specification Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External Controller Error 4

SC913-00

Notification from external application (external controller) Subject to external application (external controller) specification Turn the main power off/on.

614

Service Call 900-998

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External Controller Error 5

SC914-00

Notification from external application (external controller) Subject to external application (external controller) specification Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. SC915-01 SC915-02 SC915-03 SC915-04 SC915-05

Level A A A A A

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External Controller Error 6 (Egret board error) External Controller Error 6 (HDD serial communication error) External Controller Error 6 (CPU temperature rise) External Controller Error 6 (Unable to communicate with GW controller because invalid command was received) External Controller Error 6(Unable to communicate with GW controller because of an error) Notification from external application (external controller) Notification from external application (external controller) Replace the Egret controller board.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution External controller down While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver was detected, of BREAK signal from the other station was detected. External controller and the machine had been operating correctly (*) but the external controller was turned off or rebooted, or the video bus was disconnected. * Printing or scanning using the external controller. Turn the main power off/on.

SC919-00

615

5. Troubleshooting

SC No. SC920-00 SC920-01 SC920-02 SC920-03 SC920-04

Level B B B B B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Printer application error (No response at PM startup) Printer application error (Timeout during PM operation) Printer application error (Unable to obtain work memory) Printer application error (Unable to start filter process) Printer application error (Abnormal termination of filter process) When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued operation impossible. Software bug Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory) Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Printer application error (Resident font not found)

SC921-00

Resident font was not found at printer startup. Preinstalled font files not found. Turn the main power off/on.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Printer application error (Optional font not found)

SC921-01

Optional font required by an emulation was not found at printer startup. Optional emulation font not found Turn the main power off/on.

SC No. SC925-00 SC925-01

Level B B

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution NetFile function error NetFile function error

616

Service Call 900-998

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. HDD defective HDD inconsistency caused by power failure during HDD access, etc. Software bug If another SC related to HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) is issued at the same time, the HDD is the cause. Solve the other SC. If SC860 to SC865 is not issued Turn the main power off/on. If this does not work, initialize the HDD NetFile partition (SP5-832-011). Approval by the customer is required because received fax message waiting to be delivered and documents waiting to be captured will be lost. Procedure: 1. Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery. Then erase them. 2. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents. 3. Do SP5832-011, then turn the machine power off and on. If this does not solve the problem, initialize all partitions of the HDD (SP5-832-001), then turn the machine power off and on. Approval by the customer is required because documents and Address Book information in the HDD will be lost. Received fax messages stored are protected but the order may be changed. If this does not solve the problem, replace the HDD.

617

5. Troubleshooting

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Software operation error Software attempted an unexpected operation. Parameter error Internal parameter error

SC990-00

Insufficient work memory Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable. Turn the main power off/on. Reinstall the software of the controller and Controller board.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Recoverable software operation error Software attempted an unexpected operation. SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed toCS990. Parameter error

SC991-00

Internal parameter error Insufficient work memory Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable. Logging only

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Undefined SC issued. An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.

SC992-00

An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc. Basically a software bug. Turn the main power off/on.

618

Service Call 900-998

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable. An error occurred because the number of records exceeded the

SC994-00

limit for images managed in the service layer of the firmware. This can occur if there are too many application screens open on the operation panel. Logging only.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Application function selection error The application selected by the operation panel key operated abnormally (No response, abnormal ending).

SC997-00

Software bug (mainly the application) Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application program. Check if the combination of downloaded programs are correct.

SC No.

Level

Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution Application start error No application was registered to system within a specified time after the main power was turned on. (No application starts/All applications have been terminated abnormally) Application started but cannot be drawn now for some reason.

SC998-00

Software bug (mainly the application) The optional RAM, DIMM, boards required by the application program. Are not installed correctly. Turn the main power off/on. Check the optional RAM, DIMM, boards Check the combination of programs Replace the controller board. 619

5. Troubleshooting

When SC549 is displayed

Troubleshooting Flowchart

620

When SC549 is displayed

Fusing Shield Check

<Procedure 1: Operation check for the lower side of the shield detection feeler> 1. Place the fusing unit on a flat place and tilt it towards the drawer connector [A].

2. Move the shield drive gear with your hands to put the upper surface of the feeler [A] in a horizontal position.

3. Keep your fingers off the shield drive gear.

621

5. Troubleshooting

4. Make sure that the shield detection feeler [A] moves down to the lowest point by its own weight.

The feeler moves smoothly: OK The feeler does not move / stops during moving / moves but slowly: NG <Procedure 2: Operation check for the upper side of the shield detection feeler> 1. Place the fusing unit on a flat place with the drawer connector [A] turned up and the handle [B] touching a flat surface.

622

When SC549 is displayed

2. Move the shield drive gear with your hands to put the upper surface of the feeler [A] in a vertical position.

3. Keep your fingers off of the shield drive gear. 4. Make sure that the shield detection feeler [A] moves up to the highest point by its own weight.

The feeler moves smoothly: OK The feeler does not move / stops during moving / moves but slowly: NG 623

5. Troubleshooting

<Results> Both Procedure 1 and 2 are OK: No problem. Either Procedure 1 or 2 is NG: The mechanism is blocked. The shield detection feeler never moves while moving the shield drive gear by hands or fingers: Locked.

Solution
By tilting the fusing unit, you can check whether the feeler does not move smoothly due to burrs on a part in the unit, and remove the burrs. 1. Tilt the fusing unit [A] approx. 30.

2. Put the fusing unit back to the horizontal position. 3. Perform the checking procedures (Fusing Shield Check). There is no blockage: Resolved There is some blockage: Not resolved

624

When SC549 is displayed

4. Tilt the fusing unit [A] approx. 30 in the opposite direction from step 1.

There is no blockage: Resolved There is some blockage: Not resolved

625

5. Troubleshooting

When SC670 is displayed

Troubleshooting Flowchart

626

Jam Detection

Jam Detection
Jam Display
When a jam occurs, cause positions will blink.

627

5. Troubleshooting

Sensor Locations

628

Jam Detection

Clearing a paper jam

Do not touch any components except the specified parts for removing jammed paper. Some parts can burn you because they become hot during operation.

Do not turn the power off during removal of jammed paper. If you turned the power off, functions or values that were previously set will be deleted. Be sure not to tear paper up, and that you remove all pieces. Remaining scraps of paper in the machine could cause another paper jam or machine failure. If there are multiple jam locations, check all the locations that are displayed at the same time. See the decals on the machine for how to remove jammed paper.

Paper Jam History

History checking method
Plotter Jam History can be displayed using SP7-507. SP7-507-001 Plotter Jam History Latest SP7-507-002 Plotter Jam History Latest1 SP7-507-003 Plotter Jam History Latest2 SP7-507-004 Plotter Jam History Latest3 SP7-507-005 Plotter Jam History Latest4 SP7-507-006 Plotter Jam History Latest5 SP7-507-007 Plotter Jam History Latest6 SP7-507-008 Plotter Jam History Latest7 SP7-507-009 Plotter Jam History Latest8 SP7-507-010 Plotter Jam History Latest9

629

5. Troubleshooting

Paper Jam Display

CODE: Indicates the jam code. SIZE: Indicates the paper size code. TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001). DATE: Indicates the date when the jam occurred. The jam history of the 10 latest jams is displayed. The first jam is not included in the history record.

Jam Codes and Display Codes

Cause code: Jam cause code displayed by log data Display code: Jam position displayed on control panel ARDF DF3090 Cause code 14 64 16 66 17 67 239 MFP Cause of jam Paper did not reach projection sensor Paper held up at projection sensor Paper did not reach registration sensor Paper held up at registration sensor Paper did not reach output sensor Paper held up at output sensor Misfeed:Original Removed Display code P P P P P P P

630

Jam Detection

Cause code 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 51 52 57

Cause of jam There is paper in first transport sensor There is paper in second transport sensor There is paper in registration sensor There is paper in fixing inlet sensor There is paper in fixing outlet sensor There is paper in output sensor There is paper in inversion sensor There is paper in duplex outlet sensor There is paper in duplex inlet sensor Paper not fed from tray 1 Paper not fed from tray 2 Paper not supplied to bypass tray Duplex not fed Timing disappearance

Display code A A B C C C C Z Z A1 A2 A Z Only remaining paper position information displayed A A A B C C A A B

Paper did not reach first transport sensor Paper did not reach second transport sensor Paper did not reach registration sensor Fixing inlet sensor not reached Paper did not reach fixing outlet sensor Paper did not reach output sensor Paper did not clear first transport sensor Paper did not clear second transport sensor Paper did not clear registration sensor

631

5. Troubleshooting

Cause code 60 24 64 25 25 65 27 27 67 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 Cause code 5 13 53 1 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 Cause code 5 13 53 1 6

Cause of jam Paper did not clear output sensor Paper did not reach inversion sensor Paper did not clear inversion sensor Paper did not reach duplex outlet sensor Paper did not reach duplex outlet sensor & there is no paper in duplex inlet sensor Paper did not clear duplex outlet sensor Paper did not reach duplex inlet sensor Paper did not reach duplex inlet sensor & there is no paper in inversion sensor Paper did not clear duplex inlet sensor

Display code C C C Z Z Z C Z A

Cause of jam Paper not fed from tray 3 Paper did not reach vertical transport sensor 3 Paper did not clear vertical transport sensor 3 There is paper in vertical transport sensor 3

Display code Y1 Y Y Y

Cause of jam Paper not fed from tray 3 Paper did not reach vertical transport sensor 3 Paper did not clear vertical transport sensor 3 There is paper in vertical transport sensor 3 Paper not fed from tray 4

Display code Y1 Y Y Y Y2

632

Jam Detection

Cause code 14 54 1 Internal Finisher SR3130 Cause code 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 148 149

Cause of jam Paper did not reach vertical transport sensor 4 Paper did not clear vertical transport sensor 4 There is paper in vertical transport sensor 4

Display code Y Y Y

Cause of jam Paper did not reach inlet sensor Paper held up at inlet sensor Paper did not reach transport sensor Paper held at transport sensor Paper output unit Front jogger motor Rear jogger motor Shift roller motor Strike roller motor Paper output guide plate open/close motor Stapler displacement motor Shift tray ascent/descent motor Stapler motor Paper press motor Punch motor Punch displacement motor Horizontal registration displacement motor Paper output end not responding Main instruction data defect

Display code R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2 R1-R2

633

5. Troubleshooting

Internal Finisher SR3180 Cause code 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 348 349 308 Cause of jam Paper did not reach inlet sensor Paper held up at inlet sensor Paper did not reach output sensor Non-stapled paper held at output sensor Shift motor Junction solenoid motor Paper output pressure release motor Stapler motor Paper output end not responding Main instruction data defect Stapled paper held at output sensor Display code R R R R R R R R R R R

Paper Size Code

Size Code 005 006 014 038 044 132 133 134 A4 LEF A5 LEF B5 LEF LT LEF HLT LEF A3 SEF A4 SEF A5 SEF Paper Size Size Code 141 142 160 164 166 172 255 B4 SEF B5 SEF DLT SEF LG SEF LT SEF HLT SEF Others Paper Size

634

Image Quality

Image Quality
When an abnormal image is generated

635

5. Troubleshooting

Roller pitch
Part name Charge roller cleaner Charge roller Paper transfer roller Image transfer drive roller Development roller OPC drum Fusing sleeve Pressure roller Image transfer belt Pitch (mm) 31.4 37.7 48.7 54.8 34.6 94.2 94.2 100.5 963.8

636

OCR Unit Type M2

OCR Unit Type M2

Recovery procedure
When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card is saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD and NVRAM, this option must be reinstalled. When storing the original SD card When only the HDD is replaced Reinstall using the original SD card. When only the NVRAM is replaced When performing upload/download of NVRAM data, reinstall using the original SD card. When not performing upload/download of NVRAM data, order and reinstall a new SD card (service part). When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously Reinstall using the original SD card. If the original SD card is lost Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part). Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation. (Link: Installation procedure)

637

5. Troubleshooting

Electrical Component Defects

Name Output connector Capacit y Voltage FU10 1 CN985 (Fusing center heater) CN986 (Fusing edge heater)*1 15A*2 AC 15A*2 CN988 (DC power supply) AC 2A AC 8A FU3 CN912(IOB, SIO) 24V 8A FU4 CN917 (Interlock switch [IOB]) 24V 8A FU5 CN917 (Interlock switch [IOB]) 24V 8A 24V Part number Part name 11071241*3 TLC-15AN4*4 11071241*3 TLC-15AN4*4 11071225 SLT 250V 2A 11071283 FBT 250V 8A(EM) 11071283 FBT 250V 8A(EM) 11071283 FBT 250V 8A(EM) 11071283 FBT 250V 8A(EM) Can be changed in the field or not Remarks Yes Installed on AC control board Yes Installed on AC control board No Installed on DHB*5 Yes Installed on DC power supply Yes Installed on DC power supply Yes Installed on DC power supply Yes Installed on DC power supply

FU10 2

FU11 0

CN921 (Mainframe feed heater, Tray heater) CN922 (Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner), Anti-Condensation Heater (PCU))

FU7

CN913(FIN) CN914(BANK)

*1 NA only *2 8A for EU/AA/CHN *3 11071239 for EU/AA/CHN 638

Electrical Component Defects

*4 TLC-8A-N4 for EU/AA/CHN *5 DHB is a service option Fuse position

639

5. Troubleshooting

640

6. Environment
Environment
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.

The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if the timers are all set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before 240 min. expires. *1. The settings related to Low Power Mode are available only when setting 1 on SP5101-104. SPs for setting energy saver mode SP name SP5101-004 (Timer Set: Low Power) Value Min. Default Max. Step NA 60(s) 60(s) 1800(s) 1(m) EU 60(s) 60(s) 1800(s) 1(m) CHN 60(s) 60(s) 14400(s) 1(m) TWN 60(s) 60(s) 14400(s) 1(m) Asia 60(s) 60(s) 14400(s) 1(m)

641

6. Environment

SP name SP5101-008 (Timer Set: -)

Value Min. Default Max. Step

NA 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable)

EU 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable)

CHN 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable)

TWN 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable)

Asia 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 1 (Enable) -

1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable) 0 (Disable)

SP5101-104 (Timer Set: Low Power Set)

Min. Default Max. Step

1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) 1 (Enable) -

Timer Settings
The user can set these timers with User Tools (System settings > Timer setting) Energy saver timer (1-30 min for NA and EU/1-240 min for others): Low Power Mode. Default setting: 1 min. Auto off timer (1-60 min for NA and EU/1-240 min for others): Off/Sleep Mode. Default setting: 1 min. Normally, Energy Saver timer < Auto Off timer. But, for example, if Auto Off timer < or = Energy Saver timer, the machine goes immediately to Off mode when the Auto Off timer expires. It skips the Energy Saver mode. Example Low power: 15 min. Auto Off: 1 min. The machine goes to Off mode after 1 minute. Low Power mode is not used.

Return to Stand-by Mode

Low Power Mode

642

Environment

The recovery time depends on the model and the region. 5.1 sec. or less Off/Sleep Mode Recovery time. 5.6 sec. or less

Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept. If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy use. If it is necessary to change the settings, please try to make sure that the Auto Off timer is not too long. Try with a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the customer is not satisfied. If the timers are all set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240 minutes has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the machine for the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved. If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as explained below.

Energy Save Effectiveness

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode. 8941-001: Operating mode 8941-002: Standby mode 8941-004: Low power mode 8941-005: Off/sleep mode With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of energy that is used by the machine. This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply. To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual energy consumed. To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed: At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005. At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 to 005 again. 643

6. Environment

Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later measurement). Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode. Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)

644

EN

Model MET-C1 Machine Code: D146/D147/D148/D149/D150 Appendices

8 April, 2013

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendices:Specifications
Specifications......................................................................................................................................................3 General Specifications...................................................................................................................................3 Printer Specifications......................................................................................................................................5 Scan Specifications........................................................................................................................................6 Other Specifications.......................................................................................................................................9 HDD Specifications................................................................................................................................9 Noise Emission....................................................................................................................................10 Supported Paper Sizes....................................................................................................................................12 Original Size Detection...............................................................................................................................12 Paper Feed...................................................................................................................................................14 Tray 1 Through 3.................................................................................................................................14 Bypass Trays........................................................................................................................................17 Paper Exit......................................................................................................................................................21 Main unit tray, 1 bin tray, Shit tray, Side tray..................................................................................21 Software Accessories.......................................................................................................................................25 Printer Drivers...............................................................................................................................................25 Scanner and LAN fax drivers......................................................................................................................26 Optional Equipment.........................................................................................................................................27 ARDF DF3090 (D779)................................................................................................................................27 Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)...............................................................................................................28 Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)...............................................................................................................29 Side Tray Type M3 (D725)........................................................................................................................30 Shift Tray SH3070 (D691).........................................................................................................................31 1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D692).......................................................................................................................32 Punch Unit PU3040 (D716).......................................................................................................................32 Paper Feed Unit PB3150 (D694)..............................................................................................................33 Paper Feed Unit PB3210 (D787)..............................................................................................................33

2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

Preventive Maintenance..................................................................................................................................35 Preventive Maintenance Items....................................................................................................................35 Yield Parts............................................................................................................................................35 Mainframe...........................................................................................................................................35 1

1. Appendices:Specifications
Specifications
General Specifications
Item Configuration: CPU: RAM: Color Support: Photosensitivity type: Copy process: Development System: Fusing System: Desktop PMC-Sierra RM7035-600MHz Standard: 1.5GB Option: 2GB (Extend) Full color Electrical Potential and OPC Drum Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing Dry two-component magnetic brush development system QSU-Direct Heating (DH) Fusing System <D176> Black & White: 5.5 Sec. or less First copy time*1: Color: 7.7 Sec. or less <D177> Black & White: 5.5 Sec. or less Color: 7.7 Sec. or less <D176> Color: 20 sheets/min. Copy Speed: Black & White: 20 sheets/min. <D177> Color: 25 sheets/min. Black & White: 25 sheets/min. Spec.

1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Warm-Up-Time: D176: 19 Sec. or less (Normal Temperature 20C/68F, D177: 19 Sec. or less NRP) Maximum original size:

Spec.

A3 LEF, 11 x 17 LEF (297 x 432mm): A3 / DLT full size Main Unit upper tray (1st tray): A4 LEF, 11"x8 (LT) LEF (A5 LEF and B5 LEF are able to set by using SP mode.) Main Unit lower tray (2nd tray): SRA3 SEF, A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 SEF/LEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B6 SEF, 12"x18" SEF, 11"x17"(DLT) SEF, 8 "x14" (LG) SEF, 8 "x13" (Foolscap) SEF, 8 "x11" (LT) LEF/SEF, 8"x14" (Government LG) SEF, 8 "x13" (Folio) SEF, 8"x13"(F/GL), 8"x10" Bank lower tray: 12.6" x 17.7" / 12" x 18" to A5 LEF Bypass tray: 2.6"x17.7",12"x18"/305x458mm-A6SEF Custom size Width: 90 mm to 320 mm (Bypass) Length: 148 mm to 600 mm (FAX / Printer), 148mm to 457.2 mm (Copy / Document Box) Tray 1,2: 60 to 300g/m2

Copy Size:

Paper weight:

Bypass tray: 52 to 300g/m2 Duplex: 52 to 169g/m2 Leading edge: 4.21.5mm

Missing image area:

Left/Right: 0.5 to 4.0mm Trailing edge: 0.5 to 6.0mm (Duplex: 3.0 to 6.0mm)

Copy Scale (Zoom): Resolution (Scanning): Resolution(Writing): Gradation: Feeding System / Paper Capacity:

25 to 400%(1% step) 600dpi x 600dpi 1200 x 600dpi (Standard Speed) 1200 x 1200dpi (Half Speed) 256 tones 550 x 2 + 100 sheets 550 x 2 + 550 x 1 + 100 sheets (3 drawers model) 550 x 2 + 550 x 2 + 100 sheets (4 drawers model)

Specifications

Item Continuous Copy: 1 to 999 Sheets NA: 120 - 127V, 60Hz Power Source:

Spec.

EU, AA, CN: 220 - 240V, 50/60Hz TW: 110V, 60Hz KO: 220V, 60Hz

Max. Watts:

NA, TW: 1.584kW or less EU, AA, CN, KO: 1.7kW or less EU (up to ADF): 587 685 913 mm (23.2 27.0 36.0 inches) AA (up to exposure glass): 587 685 788 mm (23.2 27.0 31.1 inches) NA (up to ADF): 587 685 913 mm (23.2 27.0 36.0 inches)

Dimensions (W x D x H):

Unit Occupation Dimensions (W x D):

1,149 1,236 mm (45.3 48.7 inches) (including the bypass tray and output trays) NA: Approx. 90kg (198.5 lb)

Weight:

EU: Approx. 90kg (198.5 lb) AA: Approx. 81kg (178.6 lb)

*1 A4 LEF, 1st paper feed tray, with book scanner.

Printer Specifications
Item Fixed size: Print Size: Max. A3 LEF(297 x 420mm), 12 x 18 LEF (304.8 x 457.2mm) Custom: Max. 320 x 600mm (bypass tray) Printer Language Standard: PCL 5c/6, PDF Option: PostScript 3, PictBridge Spec.

1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Print Speed (A4 / 8 1/2 11 SEF): Resolution: D176: 20 pages/minute D177: 25 pages/minute

Spec.

200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi Standard: Ethernet interface (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel) USB 2.0 (Type B) port SD card slot (on the control panel) Optional: IEEE 1284 parallel interface IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface Gigabit Ether (1000BASE-T) (Optional for EFI) Bluetooth interface

Interface:

Protocol: USB Interface (Standard): Available Operating Systems:

TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), ICMP, SNMP v1/v2/v3, DNS, Dynamic DNS, DHCP(v4/v6), SNTP, LLTD, LLMNR , WINS, NBT, IKEv1, FTP-C, SMTP-C, SMB-C, PSERVER, NPRINTER, SAP, NCP-C USB2.0 TypeA Windows XP / Vista / 7 / 8 / Server 2003 / Server 2003 R2 / Server 2008 / Server 2008 R2 / Server 2012 and the successors / Mac OS X 10.5 or later PCL: 45 fonts + International fonts 13 fonts

Fonts:

PS: 136 fonts PDF: 136fonts IPDS: 108 fonts (Option)

Scale:

25% to 400%

Scan Specifications
Item Type Full-color scanner Spec.

Specifications

Item Scan Method Image Sensor Type Originals: Available Original Size for Scanning: Flatbed scanning CCD Image Sensor

Spec.

Sheet, Book, Three-dimensional object Length: 10 to 297mm Width: 10 to 432mm EU, AA: A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF, 8 1/2"x13"(Foolscap) SEF, (*SP mode adjustment is required : A5 SEF, 8"x13"(F) SEF, 8 1/4"x13"(Folio) SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/ SEF) NA: 11"x17"(DLT) SEF, 8 "x14"(LG) SEF, 8 "x11"(LT) LEF/SEF, 8 1/2"5 1/2"(HLT) LEF, (*SP mode adjustment is required : 8 1/2"5 1/2"(HLT)SEF) EU, AA: A3 SEF, B4 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B5 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B6 LEF/ SEF, DLT SEF, LT SEF/LEF, 8 1/2"x13"(Foolscap) SEF, (*SP mode adjustment is required : 8"x13"(F) SEF, 8 1/4"x13"(Folio) SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF)

Auto Detectable Size for Originals Set to Book scanner:

Auto Detectable Size for Originals Set to ADF:

NA: 11"x17" (DLT)SEF, 8 "x14" (LG)SEF, 8 "x11"(LT) LEF/SEF, 5 "x8 "(HLT) LEF/SEF, 8 1/2"13"(Foolscap) SEF, 10"x14"SEF, 11"x15"SEF (detected the same as DLT SEF, Default = DLT SEF), 8"x10"SEF (detected the same as LT SEF, Default = LT SEF), 7 1/4"x10" B&W:

Original Scanning Speed:

54pages/minute (A4/LET LEF / 200dpi/300dpi ) Push Scan Color: 54pages/minute (A4/LET LEF / 200dpi/300dpi) Push Scan

Gradation:

Black & White: 2 tones Color/Gray scale: 256 tones 7

1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Basic Scanning Resolution: Compress Format for Binary B&W Image: Compress Format for Gray Scale / Full Color: 200 dpi TIFF (MH/MR/MMR/JBIG2) JPEG

Spec.

Ethernet (1000BASE-T/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T) Interface: Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11a/b/g/n) USB2.0 Type A SD Card Slot Protocol for Network Connection: Scanning Resolution for Sending email: Available Protocol for Sending email: Output Format for Sending email*1: Scanning Resolution for Scan to Folder: Available Protocol for Send to Folder: Output Format for Send to Folder*1: Available Protocol for WSD Scanner Sending: Scan Resolution for Network TWAIN Scanner: Available Protocol for Network TWAIN Scanner: TCP/IP 100dpi, 200dpi, 300dpi, 400dpi, 600dpi POP, SMTP, IMAP4 TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Clear Light PDF, PDF/A 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi SMB, FTP, NCP TIFF, JPEG, PDF, Clear Light PDF, PDF/A Web Services on Devices for Scanning 100 to 1200 dpi TCP/IP

Specifications

Item Available Operating Systems for Network TWAIN Scanner: Scanning Resolution for Scan to Network: Scan Resolution for when Using WIA Scanner: Available Protocol for when Using WIA Scanner:

Spec. Windows XP / 7 / 8 / Vista / Server2003 / 2003 R2 / Server 2008 / 2008 R2 / Server 2012 and the successors 100 dpi, 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi 100 to 1200dpi TCP/IP Windows Vista (SP1 or later)/7/8, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012 (WIA scanner can function under both 32- and 64-bit operating systems.)

Available Operating Systems for WIA Scanner:

*1 Electric certificate can be attached when selecting [PDF], [Clear light PDF], or [PDF/A] as file format. For [PDF] or [Clear light PDF], Security Settings are available.

Other Specifications
HDD Specifications
Item Approx. 73 GB Maximum: 9,000 pages (Total number of pages that can be accommodated stored with all functions combined.) Copier/B&W/A4 original: Approx. 9,000 pages Capacity for Document Box: Copier/Full Color/A4 original: Approx. 2,200 pages Printer/Full Color/A4/600 dpi, 2 bits: Approx. 9,000 pages Scanner/Full Color/A4/200 dpi, 8 bits/JPEG: Approx. 9,000 pages (Under the printer and scanner modes, the number of the pages that can be stored depends on the print image and original.) Spec.

1. Appendices:Specifications

Item Maximum number of stored documents: 3,000 documents Maximum: 2,000 pages Number of pages supported by memory sorting:

Spec.

Copier/B&W/A4 original: Approx. 2,000 pages Printer/B&W/A4/600 dpi, 4 bits: Approx. 2,000 pages (Under the printer mode, the number of the pages that can be sorted depends on the print image.)

Noise Emission
Sound power level: Main Unit Only Item Stand-by Copying 32.4 dB (A) BW: 59.5 dB (A) FC: 60.7 dB (A) D176 32.5 dB (A) BW: 60.2 dB (A) FC: 61.6 dB (A) D177

Complete System Item Stand-by Copying Sound pressure level: Main Unit Only Item Stand-by Copying 19.5 dB (A) BW: 46.1 dB (A) FC: 46.7 dB (A) D176 dB (A) BW: 46.8 dB (A) FC: 47.6 dB (A) D177 33.0 dB (A) 67.8 dB (A) D176 32.5 dB (A) 67.8 dB (A) D177

10

Specifications

Complete System Item Stand-by Copying 19.7 dB (A) 54.8 dB (A) D176 19.5 dB (A) 55.0 dB (A) D177

Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual values measured in accordance with ISO 7779. Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the bystander. The complete system consists of the main unit, ADF, lower paper trays, internal tray 2, Internal Finisher SR3130, and punch unit.

11

1. Appendices:Specifications

Supported Paper Sizes

Original Size Detection
NA Book Y*5 Y*5 Y Y Y*5 Y*5 Y*2 Y ADF Y Y Y Y*Db Y*Dc Y*Dd Y*De Y Y Y*Sc Y*Sb Book Y*4 Y*4 Y*4, 5 Y*4, 5 Y*4 Y*4 Y*2, 4 Y*4 Y*5 Y*5 Y*S3 Y*D3 Y*S3 EU/AP ADF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y*Df Y*Dg Y*Dh Y*S3 Y*D3 Y*S3 -

Size (W x L) [mm] A3 SEF (297 x 420) B4 SEF (257 x 364) A4 SEF (210 x 297) A4 LEF (297 x 210) B5 SEF (182 x 257) B5 LEF (257 x 182) A5 SEF (148 x 210) A5 LEF (210 x 148) B6 SEF (128 x 182) B6 LEF (182 x 128) DLT SEF (11" x 17") LG SEF (81/2" x 14") LT SEF (81/2" x 11") LT LEF (11" x 81/2") HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") F SEF (8" x 13") Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") Folio SEF (11" x 15")

12

Supported Paper Sizes

Size (W x L) [mm] Folio SEF (10" x 14") Folio SEF (8" x 10") US EXE SEF (71/4" x 101/2") US EXE LEF (101/2 x 71/4") 8K SEF (267 x 390) 16K SEF (195 x 267) 16K LEF (267 x 195)

NA Book ADF Y Y*Sd Y Y*Se Book Y*4 Y*4 Y*4v

EU/AP ADF Y*Sf Y*Sg Y*Sh

Sizes with letters (a, b, c) means only either size with the corresponding letter can be selected for size detection. D is for default set sizes, and when setting S sizes for size detection from SP mode, D sizes can no longer be detected. (*2)For detected originals smaller then A5 size, with SP mode either detect as A5 or Detect as Unknown can be selected. (Default is Detect as unknown) (*3)F Sizes (8.5 x 13 SEF, 8.25 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF) will be available by SP mode settings. (*4)Switch Book scanner original detection between K series and A/B series from SP mode. (Can not set both to detect, but 8K/16K detect can de set from SO mode) 8K SEF -> Switch between A3, B4 SEF 16K SEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 SEF 16K LEF -> Switch between A4, A5, B5 LEF *Can not switch only either size. (*5)Can be selected with switching A4/LT from SP mode: Standard detect (default) When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as A4 LEF. When placing SEF, detect as LT SEF. When placing A4/LT size LEF, detect as LT LEF. When placing SEF, detect as A4 SEF. Remarks: Y Yes; available Not available

13

1. Appendices:Specifications

Paper Feed
Tray 1 Through 3
Tray 3/4 Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 1 drawer /2 drawers bank Region (EU/AA) A3 SEF (297 x 420) A4 SEF (210 x 297) A4 LEF (297 x 210) A5 SEF (148 x 210) A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A6 SEF (105 x 148) B4 SEF (257 x 364) B5 SEF (182 x 257) B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) DLT SEF (11" x 17") Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") LT SEF (81/2" x 11") LT LEF (11" x 81/2") Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") F/GL SEF (8" x 13") GLT SEF (8" x 101/2") NA K K K H EU/AA H K K K NA G2 A G1 B A B G3 A G4 B A2 A3 B A A1 B B B EU/AA A2 A A1 B A B A3 A A4 B G2 G3 B A G1 B B B NA G2 A G1 A G3 A G4 A2 A3 B A A1 B B B EU/AA A2 A A1 A A3 A A4 G2 G3 B A G1 B B B -

14

Supported Paper Sizes

Tray 3/4 Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 1 drawer /2 drawers bank Region (EU/AA) GLT LEF (101/2" x 8") Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") Eng Quatro LEF (10" x 8") Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") SRA3 SEF (420 x 320) SRA4 SEF SRA4 LEF Line slider 1 SEF Line slider 1 LEF Line slider 2 SEF Line slider 2 LEF Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) C5 SEF (162 x 229) C5 LEF (229 x 162) C6 SEF (114 x 162) C6LEF (162 x 114) NA EU/AA NA B B A4 B G5 B B B B B B B EU/AA B B G4 B A5 B B B B B B B NA B B A4 G5 B B EU/AA B B G4 A5 B B -

15

1. Appendices:Specifications

Tray 3/4 Size (W x L) [mm] Tray 1 Tray 2 1 drawer /2 drawers bank Region (EU/AA) DL Env SEF (110 x 220) DL Env LEF (220 x 110) 8K SEF (267 x 390) 16K SEF (195 x 267 ) 16K LEF (267 x 195 ) 13 x 19.2 SEF 13 x 19 SEF 13 x 18 SEF 12.6 x 19.2 SEF 12.6 x 18.5 SEF 12" x 18" SEF 12" x 18" LEF 11" x 15" SEF 11 x 14 SEF 10" x 15" SEF 10" x 14" SEF Remarks: A B C D Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting. Can be selected with size button from initial setting. Select this size by setting the dial. Set dial to *, then select with size button from initial setting. NA EU/AA NA B B B B B A5 B B EU/AA B B B B B G5 B B NA B B B A5 B B EU/AA B B B G5 B B

16

Supported Paper Sizes

<Bypass setting> E Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper size/ size button from initial setting. Select with SP from preset paper sizes. Can not be selected from printer driver. Switches witch size to set as auto detect with SP. *Example: The combination of A1-G1. G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B. G Combinations are only made from same region same tray. *Example: The combination of G1 and J1. G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E. Combinations are only made from same region same tray. H Size fixed when shipping. <Bypass setting> I With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects size, then fixed to size detected from the 2nd sheet. <Bypass setting> Auto detect of Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button. Select with SP from preset paper sizes. Can be selected from printer driver. Not available

K -

Bypass Trays
Size (W x L) [mm] Region (EU/AA) A3 SEF (297 x 420) A4 SEF (210 x 297) A4 LEF (297 x 210) A5 SEF (148 x 210) NA E E E E Bypass EU/AA J J J J One Action Bypass NA J E J J EU/AA J J J J

17

1. Appendices:Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Region (EU/AA) A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A6 SEF (105 x 148) B4 SEF (257 x 364) B5 SEF (182 x 257) B5 LEF (257 x 182 ) B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) DLT SEF (11" x 17") Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") LT SEF (81/2" x 11") LT LEF (11" x 81/2") Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") F/GL SEF (8" x 13") GLT SEF (8" x 101/2") GLT LEF (101/2" x 8") Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") Eng Quatro LEF (10" x 8") Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") NA E E E E E E J G1 E J1 J E E E E E E J -

Bypass EU/AA J J J J J J E E E E E E E E E E E E -

One Action Bypass NA J J E J J J J G1 E J1 J E E J E E J J EU/AA J J E J J J J E E E J E E J E E J J -

18

Supported Paper Sizes

Size (W x L) [mm] Region (EU/AA) SRA3 SEF (420 x 320) SRA4 SEF SRA4 LEF Line slider 1 SEF Line slider 1 LEF Line slider 2 SEF Line slider 2 LEF Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) C5 SEF (162 x 229) C5 LEF (229 x 162) C6 SEF (114 x 162) C6LEF (162 x 114) DL Env SEF (110 x 220) DL Env LEF (220 x 110) 8K SEF (267 x 390) 16K SEF (195 x 267 ) 16K LEF (267 x 195 ) 13 x 19.2 SEF 13 x 19 SEF 13 x 18 SEF 12.6 x 19.2 SEF NA J E E E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E E E -

Bypass EU/AA J E E E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E*1 E E E -

One Action Bypass NA J G3 J E*1 J*1 E*1 J*1 E*1 J3*1 E*1 J*1 E*1 J*1 J E E EU/AA J G3 J E*1 J*1 E*1 J*1 E*1 J3*1 E*1 J*1 E*1 J*1 J E E 19

1. Appendices:Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm] Region (EU/AA) 12.6 x 18.5 SEF 12" x 18" SEF 12" x 18" LEF 11" x 15" SEF 11 x 14 SEF 10" x 15" SEF 10" x 14" SEF Remarks: A B C D NA J E E

Bypass EU/AA E E E

One Action Bypass NA J E J EU/AA J E J

Auto detectable. Also can be selected with size button of initial setting. Can be selected with size button from initial setting. Select this size by setting the dial. Set dial to *, then select with size button from initial setting. <Bypass setting>

Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Size select or select with the print bypass paper size/ size button from initial setting. Select with SP from preset paper sizes. Can not be selected from printer driver. Switches witch size to set as auto detect with SP. *Example: The combination of A1-G1. G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as B.

Combinations are only made from same region same tray. *Example: The combination of G1 and J1. G (When not auto detectable) will be as same as E. Combinations are only made from same region same tray.

Size fixed when shipping.

20

Supported Paper Sizes

<Bypass setting> I With bypass tray, after 1st sheet trailing edge goes through, auto detects size, then fixed to size detected from the 2nd sheet. <Bypass setting> Auto detect of Copy window/Bypass/Standard size/Select with size button. Select with SP from preset paper sizes. Can be selected from printer driver. Not available Even the paper size is in the range or available sizes for duplex, envelopes can not be done so.

K -

*1

Paper Exit
Main unit tray, 1 bin tray, Shit tray, Side tray
Main unit tray Main unit tray A A A A A A A A A 1 bin tray Upper tray A A A A A B*1 A A A Shit tray shift A A A A A A A A A shifting A A A A A A A A A Side Tray Bridge upper exit A A A A A A A A A Side tray A A A A A A A A A

Size (W x L) [mm]

A3 SEF (297 x 420) A4 SEF (210 x 297) A4 LEF (297 x 210) A5 SEF (148 x 210) A5 LEF (210 x 148 ) A6 SEF (105 x 148) B4 SEF (257 x 364) B5 SEF (182 x 257) B5 LEF (257 x 182 )

21

1. Appendices:Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm]

Main unit tray Main unit tray A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -

1 bin tray Upper tray B*1 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -

Shit tray shift A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A shifting A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -

Side Tray Bridge upper exit A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A Side tray A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A -

B6 SEF (128 x 182 ) DLT SEF (11" x 17") Legal SEF (81/2" x 14") Foolscap SEF (81/2" x 13") LT SEF (81/2" x 11") LT LEF (11" x 81/2") Gov. LG SEF (81/4" x 14") Folio SEF (81/4" x 13") F/GL SEF (8" x 13") GLT SEF (8" x 101/2") GLT LEF (101/2" x 8") Eng Quatro SEF (8" x 10") Eng Quatro LEF (10" x 8") Executive SEF (71/4" x 101/2") Executive LEF (101/2" x 71/4") HLT SEF (51/2" x 81/2") HLT LEF (81/2" x 51/2") SRA3 SEF (420 x 320) SRA4 SEF SRA4 LEF Line slider 1 SEF

22

Supported Paper Sizes

Size (W x L) [mm]

Main unit tray Main unit tray A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

1 bin tray Upper tray B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 B*1 A A A B

Shit tray shift A A A A A A A A A A A A A A shifting A A A A A A A A A A A A A A

Side Tray Bridge upper exit A A*1,2,3 A A*1,2,3 A A A A*1,2,3 A A*1,2,3 A A A A Side tray A A A A A A A A A A

Line slider 1 LEF Line slider 2 SEF Line slider 2 LEF Com10 SEF (104.8 x 241.3) Com10 LEF (241.3 x 104.8) Monarch SEF (98.4 x 190.5) Monarch LEF (190.5 x 98.4) C5 SEF (162 x 229) C5 LEF (229 x 162) C6 SEF (114 x 162) C6LEF (162 x 114) DL Env SEF (110 x 220) DL Env LEF (220 x 110) 8K SEF (267 x 390) 16K SEF (195 x 267 ) 16K LEF (267 x 195 ) 13 x 19.2 SEF 13 x 19 SEF 13 x 18 SEF 12.6 x 19.2 SEF 12.6 x 18.5 SEF 12" x 18" SEF

23

1. Appendices:Specifications

Size (W x L) [mm]

Main unit tray Main unit tray A A

1 bin tray Upper tray A A

Shit tray shift A A shifting A A

Side Tray Bridge upper exit A A Side tray A A

12" x 18" LEF 11" x 15" SEF 11 x 14 SEF 10" x 15" SEF 10" x 14" SEF Remarks: A B *1 *2 *3

Paper through, paper exit available. Will not guarantee, but paper can go through or exit. Not available. Out of the true up precision guarantee. Envelopes can only go through each at a time. Except envelops with triangle flap.

24

Software Accessories

Software Accessories
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer allows you to select which components to install.

Printer Drivers
Printer Language PCL 5c /PCL 6 PS3 Windows XP*1*6 Yes Yes Windows Server 2003*4*6 Yes Yes Windows Vista*2*6 Yes Yes Windows Server 2008*5*6 Yes Yes Windows 7*3*6 Yes Yes Windows Server 2012*9 Yes Yes Windows 8*6*8 Yes Yes

Printer Language PCL 5c /PCL 6 PS3

Macintosh*7 No Yes

*1 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition / Home Edition / Media Center Edition / Tablet PC Edition *2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate / Enterprise / Business / Home Premium / Home Basic *3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Ultimate / Enterprise *4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition / Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition *5 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise / Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard / Enterprise *6 Supports both 32bit, 64bit *7 Supports Mac OS X 10.4 or later *8 Microsoft Windows 8 (Core Edition) / Pro / Enterprise *9 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard / Datacenter / Essentials All other Drivers except ones for Windows XP / 2003 / Vista / 7 / 8 are Adobe genuine PostScript driver. PPD file for each operation systems is included in the driver.

25

1. Appendices:Specifications

Scanner and LAN fax drivers

Driver TWAIN PC-FAX Windows XP*1*6 Yes Yes Windows Server 2003*4*6 Yes Yes Windows Vista*2*6 Yes Yes Windows Server 2008*5*6 Yes Yes Windows 7*3*6 Yes Yes Windows Server 2012*8 Yes Yes Windows 8*6*7 Yes Yes

Driver TWAIN PC-FAX

Macintosh No No

*1 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition / Home Edition / Media Center Edition / Tablet PC Edition *2 Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate / Enterprise / Business / Home Premium / Home Basic *3 Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium / Professional / Ultimate / Enterprise *4 Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition / Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2 Standard Edition / Enterprise Edition *5 Microsoft Windows Server 2008 Standard / Enterprise / Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard / Enterprise *6 Supports both 32bit, 64bit (Scanner driver works on 32bit compatible mode) *7 Microsoft Windows 8 (Core Edition) / Pro / Enterprise *8 Microsoft Windows Server 2012 Standard / Datacenter / Essentials With LAN Fax driver, sending documents directly from PC will be available. Also Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor will installed along. Network TWAIN driver will be provided on the scanner driver CD-ROM.

26

Optional Equipment

Optional Equipment
ARDF DF3090 (D779)
Mode: Batch mode, SADF mode, Mixed Sizes mode, Original Orientation mode, and Custom Size originals mode EU/AA One-sided originals: A3 SEF-B6 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF-8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF Two-sided originals: A3 SEF-A5 LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF-8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF NA One-sided originals: 11 x 17 SEF-5 1/2 x 8 1/2 LEF/ SEF, A3 SEF-A4 LEF/SEF Two-sided originals: 11 x 17 SEF-5 1/2 x 8 1/2 LEF/SEF, A3 SEF-A4 LEF/SEF Original weight: One-sided originals: 40-128 g/m2 (11-34 lb. Bond) Two-sided originals: 52-128 g/m2 (14-34 lb. Bond)

Original Size:

Number of originals to be set (81 100 sheets g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): Maximum power consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight: 42 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 565 x 500 x 125 mm (22.3 x 19.7 x 5.0 inches) Approx. 9 kg (19.9 lb.)

27

1. Appendices:Specifications

Internal Finisher SR3130 (D690)

A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 LEF/SEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 LEF/ SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env LEF/SEF, DL Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, custom size 60300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA4 SEF, custom size 64105 g/m2 (1728 lb. Bond) 500 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller 250 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF 64105 g/m2 (1728 lb. Bond) Without Mixed Size: 30 sheets: A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8K SEF 50 sheets: A4 LEF/SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 16K LEF/SEF With Mixed Size: 30 sheets: A3 SEF/ A4 LEF, B4 JIS SEF/ B5 JIS LEF, 11 x 17 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 LEF

Paper size:

Paper weight:

Paper sizes that can be shifted:

Paper weight that can be shifted: Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):

Staple paper size:

Staple paper weight:

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):

28

Optional Equipment

29 sheets: 5546 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF) 1050 sheets: 4510 sets (A4 LEF, 8 1/2 x 11LEF) 29 sheets: 5527 sets (A4 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF) Stack capacity after stapling (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 10 50 sheets: 258 sets (A4 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF) 29 sheets: 5527 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF) 1030 sheets: 258 sets (A3 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF) Staple position: Top 1, Bottom 1, Left 2, Top 2 50 W or less (without punch unit) (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 60 W or less (with punch unit) (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 546 x 523 x 170 mm (21.5 x 20.6 x 6.7 inches) Approx. 13 kg (28.7 lb.) (without punch unit) Approx. 17 kg (37.5 lb.) (with punch unit)

Power consumption:

Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

Internal Finisher SR3180 (D766)

A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, custom size 52300 g/m2(14 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, custom size 6480 g/m2 (1720 lb. Bond) 250 sheets or more:A4 LEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 81/2 x 11 LEF/SEF 125 sheets: A3 SEF to A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF, 11 x 17 SEF

Paper size:

Paper weight:

Paper sizes that can be shifted:

Paper weight that can be shifted:

Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):

29

1. Appendices:Specifications

Staple paper size:

A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF 6480 g/m2 (1720 lb. Bond) 5 sheets:

Staple paper weight:

Staple capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS LEF/SEF, B5JIS LEF/SEF, 11x17 SEF, 8 1/2x14 SEF, 8 1/2x13 SEF 81/2x11 LEF/SEF, 8 Bond): 4/1x14SEF, 8 1/4x13 SEF, 7 1/4x10 1/2 LEF/ SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF SEF 30 sets or more (A4 LEF, 81/2 11 LEF) Stack capacity after stapling (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): 20 sets or more (B5 JIS LEF/SEF) 15 sets or more (A3 SEF- A4 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, 11 17 SEF, 8 1/2 11 SEF) Bottom Slant 30 W or less 435 x 515 x 150 mm (17.2 x 20.3 x 6.0 inches) Approx. 10 kg (22.1 lb.)

Staple position: Power consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

Side Tray Type M3 (D725)

A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 LEF/SEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 LEF/ SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env LEF/SEF, DL Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, custom size 52300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover)

Paper size:

Paper weight:

30

Optional Equipment

Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):

Internal tray 1: 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger External tray: 125 sheets 12 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 800 x 549 x 156 mm (31.5 x 21.7 x 6.2 inches) Approx. 4 kg (8.9 lb.)

Power consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

Shift Tray SH3070 (D691)

A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 LEF/SEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 LEF/ SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env LEF/SEF, DL Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, custom size 60300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, A6 SEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, B6 JIS SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 LEF/SEF, 3 7/8 x 7 1/2 LEF/ SEF, C5 Env LEF/SEF, C6 Env LEF/SEF, DL Env LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, custom size 60300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) 250 sheets: A4, 81/2 x 11 or smaller 125 sheets: B4 JIS, 81/2 x 14 or larger 5 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 420 x 489 x 107 mm (16.6 x 19.3 x 4.3 inches) Approx. 2 kg (4.5 lb.) 31

Paper size:

Paper weight:

Paper sizes that can be shifted:

Paper weight that can be shifted: Stack capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): Power consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

1. Appendices:Specifications

1 Bin Tray BN3110 (D692)

Number of bins: 1 A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF/SEF, B4 JIS SEF B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 51/2 x 8 1/2 SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, SRA3 SEF, SRA4 LEF/SEF, custom size 52300 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) 125 sheets 1 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 444 x 450 x 150 mm (17.5 x 17.8 x 6.0 inches) Approx. 2 kg (4.5 lb.)

Paper size:

Paper weight: Paper capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): Power consumption: Dimensions (W x D x H): Weight:

Punch Unit PU3040 (D716)

Paper Size: Punch unit type 2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes 2 & 4 holes type: 2 holes 2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes 2 & 4 holes type: 4 holes 4 holes type: 4 holes 4 holes type: 4 holes 2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes 2 & 3 holes type: 2 holes 32 Paper size SEF: A3, A4, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2, 8K, 16K LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11, 16K SEF: A3, 11 x 17 LEF: A4, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF: A3, A4, B4 JIS, B5 JIS, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF: A4, B5 JIS, 8 1/2 x 11 SEF: A3, 11 x 17, 8 1/2 x 14, 8 1/2 x 13, 8 1/2 x 11, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF: A4, 8 1/2 x 11

Optional Equipment

2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes 2 & 3 holes type: 3 holes Paper weight:

SEF: A3, 11 x 17 LEF: A4, 8 1/2 x 11 60169 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond 90 lb. Index)

Paper Feed Unit PB3150 (D694)

Number of trays: 1 A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/ SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 LEF, C5 Env LEF, SRA3 SEF, custom size 60300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) 550 sheets 1 tray 19 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 587 685 120 mm (23.2 27.0 4.8 inches) Approx. 11 kg (24.3 lb.)

Paper size:

Paper Weight: Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond): Power Consumption: Dimension: Weight:

Paper Feed Unit PB3210 (D787)

Number of trays: 2 A3 SEF, A4 LEF/SEF, A5 LEF, B4 JIS SEF, B5 JIS LEF/SEF, 11 x 17 SEF, 8 1/2 x 14 SEF, 8 1/2 x 13 SEF, 8 1/2 x 11 LEF/ SEF, 8 1/4 x 14 SEF, 8 1/4 x 13 SEF, 8 x 13 SEF, 8 x 10 SEF, 7 1/4 x 10 1/2 LEF/SEF, 8K SEF, 16K LEF/SEF, 12 x 18 SEF, 11 x 15 SEF, 10 x 14 SEF, 4 1/8 x 9 1/2 LEF, C5 Env LEF, SRA3 SEF, custom size 60300 g/m2 (16 lb. Bond110 lb. Cover) 550 sheets 2 trays

Paper size:

Paper Weight: Paper Capacity (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond):

33

1. Appendices:Specifications

Power Consumption: Dimension: Weight:

21 W or less (Power is supplied from the main unit.) 587 685 247 mm (23.2 27.0 9.8 inches) Approx. 21 kg (46.3 lb.)

34

2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

Preventive Maintenance
Preventive Maintenance Items
Preventive Maintenance Items

Yield Parts
The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, P/J, and C/O). So, these parts are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). The parts with (R) in this table are yield parts. Chart: A4 (LT)/5% Mode: 4 copies / original (prints/job) Ratio 30% Environment: Normal temperature and humidity Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions. Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect

Mainframe
Item Scanner Reflector 1st mirror 2nd mirror 3rd mirror Exposure Glass C C C C C C Optics cloth Optics cloth Optics cloth Optics cloth Exposure glass cleaner 60K 120K 240K 300K EM Remarks

35

2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

Item Guide Rail(Both sides 2 steps) ADF Exposure Glass PCU PCU(K) PCU(C,M,Y)

60K

120K

240K

300K C C

EM

Remarks Dry cloth

Exposure glass cleaner

R Logging counts to replace: 48K *Replace when full of waste toner bottle detected. R R

Waste Toner Bottle Development Unit (K) Development Unit (C,M,Y) Transfer Image Transfer Cleaning Unit Image Transfer Belt Unit Paper transfer roller unit Fusing Heating Sleeve Unit (Fusing sleeve unit) Fusing Entrance guide plate Fusing Exit guide plate Separation Plate Pressure Roller R R C C C R R R

Upper limit counts to replace: 248K Clean deposit toner Clean deposit toner Clean deposit toner

36

Preventive Maintenance

Item Bearing: Fusing Roller

60K

120K

240K R

300K

EM

Remarks Lubricating grease Logging counts for cleaning, maintenance and lubrication:400K Dry cloth

Thermopile

Gears idler gear Miscellaneous Dust-shield Filter (Dust Filter) Dust Glass TM/P sensor Item Paper Feed (Mainframe) Registration Roller Registration Sensor Paper powder removal container Transport roller Transfer Sensor Paper feed sensor Paper Feed roller Separation Roller Pick-up roller Paper Feed (Paper Trays) C C C C C C C C C Damp cloth EM R

C C

Replace when worn out Replace when worn out

C C Remarks

Exposure glass cleaner

Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust Damp cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth

37

2. Appendices:Preventive Maintenance Tables

Item Transport roller Transfer Sensor Paper feed sensor Paper Feed roller Separation Roller Pick-up roller Duplex Duplex transport roller Duplex inlet sensor Duplex outlet sensor Duplex outlet roller Duplex inlet roller By-pass paper feed roller By-pass Separation Roller By-pass pick-up roller By-pass transport roller Paper Exit Inversion Roller Inversion Sensor Paper eject roller Paper eject sensor

EM C C C C C C Damp cloth

Remarks

Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth

C C C C C C C C C

Damp cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth Damp cloth Damp cloth Damp cloth Damp cloth Damp cloth Damp cloth

C C C C

Damp cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Damp cloth Damp cloth Remove toner and paper dust, Dry cloth

38

MEMO

39

MEMO

40

EN